1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8366 \begin_layout Standard
8371 environment is identical to
8375 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8383 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8388 \begin_layout Section
8389 Nesting Environments
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 Nesting ! Environments
8400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8409 \begin_layout Subsection
8413 \begin_layout Standard
8415 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8417 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8419 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8421 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8456 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8457 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8465 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8477 \begin_inset space ~
8482 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8484 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8487 arg "depth-increment"
8493 arg "depth-decrement"
8507 arg "depth-increment"
8513 arg "depth-decrement"
8517 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8518 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8522 \begin_layout Standard
8523 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8524 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8525 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8526 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8527 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8533 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8535 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8538 \begin_layout Subsection
8539 What You Can and Can't Nest
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8544 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8549 than a simple yes or no.
8550 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Completely unnestable
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8569 environments have them:
8572 \begin_layout Description
8573 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8574 Can't nest into them.
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Description
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8614 Nestable You can nest them.
8615 You can nest other things into them.
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Description
8682 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8683 You can't nest anything into them.
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_inset space ~
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8801 \begin_inset space ~
8804 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8805 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8806 nested section headings violate this.
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8815 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8816 \begin_inset Index idx
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8820 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8830 affected by nesting anyhow.
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8856 Figures and tables in
8860 are not affected by this.
8865 Have a look at section
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8872 reference "sec:Floats"
8876 for more information about
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8885 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8886 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8899 of its own, it behaves just like a
8900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8907 paragraph environment.
8908 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8913 Here's an example with a table:
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 This is (a) and it's nested.
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8935 \begin_inset Tabular
8936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9051 This is (a) and it's nested.
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9056 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9064 \begin_inset Tabular
9065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9166 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9182 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 This is (a) and it's nested.
9194 \begin_layout Standard
9195 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset Tabular
9204 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9205 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9299 \begin_layout Enumerate
9301 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 \begin_layout Standard
9313 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9319 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9320 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9324 \begin_layout Subsection
9325 Usage and General Features
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9330 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9339 is the innermost possible depth.
9340 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 level #1 – outermost
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Standard
9378 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9379 both of them in the example.
9380 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9390 For example, if we tried to nest another
9395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9402 , we would get errors.
9405 \begin_layout Subsection
9407 \begin_inset Index idx
9410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9419 \begin_layout Standard
9420 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9421 We have several examples of nested environments.
9422 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9427 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #2-a This is level #2.
9444 We created it by using
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-a This is level #3.
9463 This time, we just enter
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9474 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9478 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9484 arg "depth-increment"
9491 \begin_layout Standard
9496 environment, nested inside of
9497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9505 So, it's at level #4.
9506 We did this by entering
9509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9515 arg "depth-increment"
9518 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9523 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9539 \begin_layout Standard
9544 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9547 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9553 \begin_layout Labeling
9554 \labelwidthstring MMM
9555 #4-a This is level #4.
9559 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9562 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9567 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9571 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9576 keep nesting things inside
9577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9588 \begin_layout Labeling
9589 \labelwidthstring MMM
9590 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9598 and this is level #6.
9599 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9605 #5-b Back to level #5.
9609 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9615 arg "depth-decrement"
9622 \begin_layout Labeling
9623 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 , we're back at level #4.
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #3-b Back to level #3.
9643 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9647 \begin_layout Labeling
9648 \labelwidthstring MMM
9649 #2-b Back to level #2.
9654 \begin_layout Labeling
9655 \labelwidthstring MMM
9656 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9657 After this sentence, we will enter
9661 and change the paragraph environment back to
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9669 We could have also used the
9685 environment in place of the
9690 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9694 Example 2: Inheritance
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9698 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9701 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9710 arg "depth-increment"
9714 \begin_inset Newline newline
9717 which, we will change to the
9725 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 environment, at level #2.
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 Notice how the nested
9738 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9742 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9746 \begin_layout Standard
9747 We ended this example by entering
9752 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9756 and reset the nesting depth by using
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9766 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9775 \begin_inset Argument 1
9778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9779 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9787 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 This is level #1, in an
9792 paragraph environment.
9793 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9797 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9808 arg "depth-increment"
9812 Now, what happens if we nest an
9816 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9817 label be? An asterisk?
9821 \begin_layout Itemize
9831 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9832 So, its label is a bullet.
9833 (We got here by using
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 arg "depth-increment"
9845 , then changing the environment to
9853 \begin_layout Itemize
9854 Here's level #4, produced using
9857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9863 arg "depth-increment"
9867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9880 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9884 , because we are in the
9892 environment (that is, it is an
9907 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9913 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 arg "depth-decrement"
9934 to decrease the depth after the next
9937 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9954 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9968 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9973 reset the counter for the label.
9977 \begin_layout Enumerate
9981 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 arg "depth-decrement"
9990 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9991 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9992 into the twofold-nested
10000 \begin_layout Enumerate
10001 The same thing happens if we do another
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 arg "depth-decrement"
10013 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10016 \begin_layout Standard
10017 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10022 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10033 The number of other
10037 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10044 The same rule applies for the
10048 environment, as well.
10051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10052 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10057 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10058 the same detail with how we did it.
10067 \begin_layout Standard
10075 arg "depth-increment"
10082 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10083 the example in parentheses someplace.
10084 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10085 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10086 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10095 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Now we will add verse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 It will get much worse.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10131 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10145 \begin_layout Verse
10146 Here comes a table:
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10157 \begin_layout Standard
10159 \begin_inset Tabular
10160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10161 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10248 \begin_layout Verse
10252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10262 arg "depth-increment"
10268 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10274 \begin_inset Newline newline
10282 arg "depth-decrement"
10289 \begin_layout Enumerate
10294 : level #1) This is another item.
10295 Note that selecting a
10299 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10300 3 times to put the table inside the
10308 \begin_layout Quotation
10309 We're now ending the
10313 list and changing to
10318 We're still at level #1.
10319 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10320 The next set of paragraphs is a
10321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10328 We will nest both the
10335 \begin_inset space ~
10340 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10344 for the letter body.
10348 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10351 to preserve the depth.
10352 Remember that you need to use
10355 arg "newline-insert newline"
10358 to create multiple lines inside the
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_layout Right Address
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10380 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10381 \begin_inset Newline newline
10387 \begin_layout Address
10389 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10400 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10401 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10402 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10403 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10404 as soon as possible.
10405 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10410 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10411 with your order, along with payment.
10414 \begin_layout Quotation
10415 We thank you again for your patience.
10418 \begin_layout Address
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10427 \begin_layout Quotation
10428 That ends that example!
10431 \begin_layout Standard
10432 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10433 gives you a lot of power with just
10435 We could have easily nested an
10456 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10459 \begin_layout Subsection
10461 \begin_inset Index idx
10464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10465 Nesting ! Separation
10471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10473 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10483 For example you need two different enumerations:
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset Separator plain
10507 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Enumerate
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10534 list item and use the menu
10535 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652028
10539 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652029
10542 \SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652035
10545 Start New Environment
10546 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652814
10547 Separated <Name> Above
10551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10552 Separated <Name> Below
10557 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10559 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652169
10562 behind it the new list.
10564 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652256
10567 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10568 Start New Parent Environment
10570 only appears if the item is nested.
10571 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10573 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652300
10574 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment
10579 \begin_layout Standard
10580 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10581 (red arrow in LyX).
10582 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10583 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10590 arg "paragraph-break"
10597 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10600 \begin_layout Section
10601 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10602 \begin_inset Index idx
10605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10614 \begin_layout Standard
10615 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10616 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10618 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10619 be broken at the end of a line.
10620 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10624 \begin_layout Subsection
10626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10628 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10633 \begin_inset Index idx
10636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10645 \begin_layout Standard
10646 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10647 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10648 ) not to break the line at
10650 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10653 \begin_layout Quote
10654 Further documentation is given in section
10655 \begin_inset Newline newline
10659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10661 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10669 \begin_layout Standard
10670 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10685 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10694 A protected space is set with
10696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10697 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10699 \begin_inset space ~
10707 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10713 \begin_layout Subsection
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10717 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10722 \begin_inset Index idx
10725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10726 Spacing ! Horizontal
10734 \begin_layout Standard
10735 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10738 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10742 The length units are listed in Appendix
10743 \begin_inset space ~
10747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10749 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10760 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10765 \begin_inset Index idx
10768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10769 Spaces ! Inter-word
10777 \begin_layout Standard
10778 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10779 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10780 at the ends of sentences.
10781 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10782 automatically takes care about this.
10783 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10784 followed by a period; see section
10785 \begin_inset space ~
10789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10791 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10796 To insert a normal space, select
10798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10799 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10801 \begin_inset space ~
10809 arg "space-insert normal"
10815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10819 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10824 \begin_inset Index idx
10827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10845 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10854 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10855 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10856 inside abbreviations:
10859 \begin_layout Quote
10861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10865 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10868 \begin_layout Standard
10869 or between values and units.
10870 Compare for example this:
10871 \begin_inset Newline newline
10875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10879 \begin_inset Newline newline
10882 10 kg (normal space
10885 \begin_layout Standard
10886 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10889 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10899 arg "space-insert thin"
10905 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10909 \begin_layout Standard
10910 You can also insert the following space types:
10913 \begin_layout Description
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10922 space A line with a
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10927 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10931 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10934 negative thin space between the arrows.
10937 \begin_layout Description
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10943 \begin_inset space ~
10946 space A line with a
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10951 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10955 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10958 negative medium space between the arrows.
10961 \begin_layout Description
10963 \begin_inset space ~
10967 \begin_inset space ~
10970 space A line with a
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10975 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10979 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10982 negative thick space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11067 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11071 \begin_inset space ~
11075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11078 em) space between the arrows.
11081 \begin_layout Description
11083 \begin_inset space ~
11087 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11091 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11096 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11103 cm space between the arrows.
11106 \begin_layout Standard
11108 \begin_inset space ~
11112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11114 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11118 lists the different space sizes.
11121 \begin_layout Standard
11122 \begin_inset Float table
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11128 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11133 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11137 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 \begin_inset Tabular
11148 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11149 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11150 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11267 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11426 \begin_inset Index idx
11429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11438 \begin_layout Standard
11439 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11440 feature for adding extra space
11441 in a uniform fashion.
11442 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11443 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11444 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11445 equally between themselves.
11448 \begin_layout Standard
11449 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11452 \begin_layout Quote
11454 This is on the left side
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 This is on the right
11461 \begin_layout Quote
11464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11468 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_layout Quote
11477 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11481 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11492 That was an example in the
11498 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11502 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11506 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11509 is one in a standard paragraph.
11510 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11514 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11517 \begin_layout Standard
11518 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11526 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11529 \begin_layout Standard
11531 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11535 \begin_inset space ~
11541 \begin_layout Standard
11543 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11547 \begin_inset space ~
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11555 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11559 \begin_inset space ~
11565 \begin_layout Standard
11567 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11571 \begin_inset space ~
11577 \begin_layout Standard
11579 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11583 \begin_inset space ~
11589 \begin_layout Standard
11591 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11595 \begin_inset space ~
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11610 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11614 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11616 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11617 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11621 option in the space dialog.
11629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11633 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11638 \begin_inset Index idx
11641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11650 \begin_layout Standard
11651 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11652 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11655 \begin_layout Standard
11656 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11659 What is correct English?:
11660 \begin_inset Newline newline
11664 \begin_inset Newline newline
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11671 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11672 \begin_inset Newline newline
11676 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11687 \begin_inset Newline newline
11691 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11702 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11708 \begin_layout Standard
11710 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11715 \begin_inset space ~
11719 \begin_inset space ~
11723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11727 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11730 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11734 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11740 \begin_inset space ~
11744 \begin_inset space ~
11748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11751 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11760 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11761 That is why it is named
11762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11770 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11771 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11775 \begin_layout Subsection
11777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11779 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11784 \begin_inset Index idx
11787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11796 \begin_layout Standard
11797 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11800 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 \begin_inset space ~
11808 There you find the following sizes:
11811 \begin_layout Standard
11824 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11825 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11830 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11832 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11833 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11835 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_inset Index idx
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 Document ! Settings
11850 for the paragraph separation.
11851 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11862 \begin_layout Standard
11868 \begin_inset Index idx
11871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11877 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11878 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11883 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11884 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11893 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11902 s are described in section
11903 \begin_inset space ~
11907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11909 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11918 If there are several
11922 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11923 You can therefore use
11927 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11935 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11936 \begin_inset space ~
11940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11942 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11949 \begin_layout Standard
11950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11960 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11961 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11973 \begin_layout Subsection
11974 Paragraph Alignment
11975 \begin_inset Index idx
11978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11979 Paragraph ! Alignment
11987 \begin_layout Standard
11988 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11993 dialog (toolbar button
11996 arg "layout-paragraph"
12000 There are five possibilities:
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12017 \begin_layout Itemize
12025 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12031 \begin_layout Itemize
12039 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12045 \begin_layout Itemize
12053 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12059 \begin_layout Itemize
12067 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12074 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12075 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12076 the left and right margins.
12077 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12080 \begin_layout Standard
12082 This paragraph is right aligned,
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12087 this one is centered,
12090 \begin_layout Standard
12092 this one is left aligned.
12095 \begin_layout Subsection
12097 \begin_inset Index idx
12100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12101 Page breaks ! Forced
12107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12109 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12116 \begin_layout Standard
12117 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12118 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12119 force a page break where you want one.
12120 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12121 is good at page breaking.
12122 Only if you use a lot of
12126 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12127 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12130 \begin_layout Standard
12131 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12132 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12136 have to change the page breaking.
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12140 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12142 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12145 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12147 \begin_inset space ~
12153 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12156 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12158 \begin_inset space ~
12163 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12165 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12166 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12169 \begin_layout Standard
12170 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12171 at the top of a page.
12172 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12174 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12175 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12176 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12180 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12184 to learn more about
12191 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12195 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12200 \begin_inset Index idx
12203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12204 Page breaks ! Clear
12212 \begin_layout Standard
12213 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12214 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12215 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12216 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12217 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12220 \begin_layout Standard
12221 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12224 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12226 \begin_inset space ~
12232 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12235 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12237 \begin_inset space ~
12241 \begin_inset space ~
12246 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12247 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12250 \begin_layout Subsection
12252 \begin_inset Index idx
12255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12264 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12271 \begin_layout Standard
12272 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12274 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12277 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12291 arg "newline-insert newline"
12295 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12298 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12300 \begin_inset space ~
12304 \begin_inset space ~
12312 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12315 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12317 This is useful to avoid
12318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12325 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12328 \begin_layout Standard
12329 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12330 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12332 very good at line breaking.
12333 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12334 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12335 \begin_inset space ~
12339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12341 reference "sec:Quote"
12346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12348 reference "sec:Verse"
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12355 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12362 \begin_layout Subsection
12364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12366 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12371 \begin_inset Index idx
12374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12385 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12396 \begin_layout Standard
12400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12401 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12408 you can insert horizontal lines.
12409 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12410 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12411 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12414 \begin_layout Standard
12416 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12427 \begin_layout Section
12428 Characters and Symbols
12431 \begin_layout Standard
12432 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12433 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12434 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12442 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12446 for information on how this is done.
12449 \begin_layout Standard
12450 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12455 dialog via the menu
12457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12458 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12464 \begin_layout Standard
12465 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12473 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12474 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12476 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12484 \begin_layout Section
12485 Fonts and Text Styles
12486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12488 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12495 \begin_layout Subsection
12497 \begin_inset Index idx
12500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12509 \begin_layout Standard
12510 There are two types of fonts:
12513 \begin_layout Description
12515 \begin_inset space ~
12519 \begin_inset Index idx
12522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12528 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12533 characters) in the font.
12534 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12535 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12536 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12537 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12538 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12539 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12540 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12541 \begin_inset Newline newline
12544 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12545 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12546 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12547 sizes than at small ones.
12548 \begin_inset Newline newline
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12570 \begin_layout Description
12572 \begin_inset space ~
12576 \begin_inset Index idx
12579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12585 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12586 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12587 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12588 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12589 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12590 image manipulation program.
12591 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12592 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12593 \begin_inset space ~
12596 pixels high up to 34
12597 \begin_inset space ~
12600 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12601 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12602 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12604 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12605 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12606 \begin_inset Newline newline
12609 Bitmap fonts are named
12612 \begin_inset space ~
12617 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12621 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12622 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12623 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12624 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12625 use scalable fonts.
12628 \begin_layout Standard
12629 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12634 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12635 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12636 font to emphasize text, you use an
12637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12645 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12647 In \SpecialChar LyX
12648 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12652 \begin_layout Subsection
12655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12657 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12664 \begin_layout Standard
12665 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12666 used its own fonts.
12667 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12668 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12672 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12673 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12674 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12675 to a word processor.
12676 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12677 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12678 files are very portable across
12679 different machines.
12680 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12681 has increased a lot
12682 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12685 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12687 \begin_inset space ~
12691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12693 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12698 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12699 code in the document
12700 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12703 \begin_layout Standard
12704 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12705 engines that are also able directly
12706 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12708 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12710 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12712 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12713 that is installed on your system.
12714 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12717 \begin_layout Standard
12718 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12727 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12735 \begin_layout Subsection
12736 Document Font and Font size
12737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12739 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12744 \begin_inset Index idx
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12754 \begin_inset Index idx
12757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12766 \begin_layout Standard
12767 You can set the document fonts in the
12769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12773 \begin_inset Index idx
12776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12777 Document ! Settings
12787 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12788 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12791 \begin_inset space ~
12800 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12802 \begin_inset space ~
12805 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12808 \begin_layout Standard
12813 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12814 This requires that you use
12826 as the output format, i.
12827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12831 \begin_inset space \space{}
12834 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12835 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12836 installed (see section
12837 \begin_inset space ~
12841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12843 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12848 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12850 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12851 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12853 \begin_inset space ~
12856 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12857 cannot determine the family.
12858 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12859 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12862 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12865 \begin_layout Standard
12866 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12867 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12872 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12878 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12879 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12888 \begin_inset space ~
12894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12919 European Computer Modern
12922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12930 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12933 \begin_layout Standard
12938 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12939 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12944 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12947 \begin_inset space ~
12952 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12958 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12959 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12962 \begin_layout Itemize
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12971 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12984 \begin_inset space ~
12989 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12990 community in order to replace
12994 as the default font.
12995 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12996 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12999 \begin_inset space ~
13012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13013 One difference is improved kerning.
13021 \begin_layout Itemize
13022 If you do not like the look of
13030 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 \begin_inset space ~
13041 \begin_inset space ~
13051 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13052 \begin_inset space ~
13055 serif and typewriter fonts,
13059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13060 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13076 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13081 \begin_inset space \space{}
13089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13093 \begin_inset space \space{}
13099 \begin_inset space ~
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13117 but you can also select your own.
13118 \begin_inset Newline newline
13121 The differences between roman,
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13133 fonts are explained in section
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13140 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13145 \begin_inset Newline newline
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13156 was originally designed for newspapers.
13157 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13158 into the small newspaper columns.
13162 \begin_inset space ~
13167 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13170 \begin_layout Standard
13171 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13184 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13189 depends on the class you are using.
13190 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13194 Note that the font size is the
13199 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13200 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13201 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13202 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13211 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13218 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13225 \begin_layout Standard
13229 \begin_inset space ~
13234 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13239 serif or typewriter.
13244 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13254 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13257 \begin_layout Standard
13262 LaTeX font encoding
13264 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13265 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13271 \begin_inset Index idx
13274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13282 \begin_inset space ~
13286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13288 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13293 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13294 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13301 \begin_layout Standard
13302 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13304 Use Old Style Figures
13308 Use True Small Caps
13311 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13314 Use Old Style Figures
13316 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13318 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13326 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13330 Use True Small Caps
13332 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13333 of scaled capitals.
13334 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13335 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13338 \begin_layout Standard
13343 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13344 a font to display the script characters.
13348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13349 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13355 \begin_inset Index idx
13358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 So this has no effect for the document language
13381 \begin_layout Standard
13384 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13386 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13387 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13393 \begin_inset Index idx
13396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13398 packages ! microtype
13405 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514889567
13409 \begin_layout Standard
13411 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514890586
13414 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13419 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514890570
13422 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13426 outputs en- and em-dashes as
13427 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514890990
13428 ligatures (--, ---)
13429 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891156
13434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13436 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891207
13437 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13438 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13449 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891082
13451 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891224
13452 ligatures (--, ---) (cf.
13454 \begin_inset space ~
13458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13460 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13472 \begin_layout Standard
13473 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13477 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13485 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13490 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13491 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13493 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13498 dialog, see section
13499 \begin_inset space ~
13503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13505 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13517 \begin_layout Subsection
13521 \begin_layout Standard
13522 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13523 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13525 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13526 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13527 choose a math font in the dialog
13529 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13533 \begin_inset Index idx
13536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13537 Document ! Settings
13543 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13544 automatically selects a math font.
13545 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13546 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13555 \begin_inset space ~
13561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13566 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13567 document font is available.
13570 \begin_layout Standard
13571 Note that the math font will not be used for
13575 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13581 or by the insertion of the command
13588 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13589 \begin_inset space ~
13593 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13594 while the math characters do not.
13596 \begin_inset space ~
13599 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13602 \begin_inset space ~
13610 \begin_inset space ~
13615 in the document font settings.
13618 \begin_layout Standard
13619 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13620 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13621 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13622 font (in most cases
13623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13629 \begin_inset space ~
13635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13638 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13639 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13647 \begin_inset space ~
13653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13659 \begin_layout Subsection
13660 Using Different Character Styles
13661 \begin_inset Index idx
13664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13671 \begin_inset Index idx
13674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13683 \begin_layout Standard
13684 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13685 automatically changes the character style for certain
13686 paragraph environments.
13688 supports two character styles,
13697 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13701 \begin_layout Standard
13706 style, do one of the following:
13709 \begin_layout Itemize
13710 click on the toolbar button
13719 \begin_layout Itemize
13720 use the key binding
13729 \begin_layout Standard
13730 These commands are all toggles.
13735 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 One typically uses the
13743 style for proper names.
13745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13752 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13761 A more widely used character style is the
13766 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13773 \begin_layout Itemize
13774 clicking on the toolbar button
13783 \begin_layout Itemize
13784 using the keybindings
13793 \begin_layout Standard
13798 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13800 use a different font.
13803 \begin_layout Standard
13804 We've been using the
13808 style all over the place in this document.
13809 Here's one more example:
13812 \begin_layout Quotation
13815 Do not overuse character styles!
13818 \begin_layout Standard
13819 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13820 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13821 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13822 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13826 \begin_layout Standard
13827 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13837 \begin_inset space ~
13840 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13846 arg "dialog-show character"
13852 \begin_layout Subsection
13853 Fine-Tuning with the
13858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13860 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13865 \begin_inset Index idx
13868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13877 \begin_layout Standard
13878 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13880 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13881 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13882 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13883 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13884 from ordinary dialog.
13887 \begin_layout Standard
13888 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13889 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13890 \begin_inset Newline newline
13893 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13894 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13897 \begin_layout Standard
13898 To use custom character styles, open the
13900 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13902 \begin_inset space ~
13905 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13908 dialog or press the toolbar button
13911 arg "dialog-show character"
13915 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13916 font property that you can choose.
13917 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13920 \begin_inset space ~
13925 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13930 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13931 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13932 environments all at once.
13935 \begin_layout Standard
13936 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13939 \begin_inset space ~
13951 \begin_layout Labeling
13952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13966 The possible options are:
13970 \begin_layout Labeling
13971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 This is the Roman font family.
13977 Normally a serif font.
13978 It's also the default family.
13988 \begin_layout Labeling
13989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13993 \begin_inset space ~
14000 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14012 \begin_layout Labeling
14013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14020 This is the Typewriter font family.
14026 arg "font-typewriter"
14035 \begin_layout Labeling
14036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14041 This corresponds to the print weight.
14046 \begin_layout Labeling
14047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14052 This is the Medium font series.
14053 It's also the default series.
14056 \begin_layout Labeling
14057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14064 This is the Bold font series.
14077 \begin_layout Labeling
14078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14083 As the name implies.
14088 \begin_layout Labeling
14089 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14094 This is the Upright font shape.
14095 It's also the default shape.
14098 \begin_layout Labeling
14099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14113 s the Italic font shape
14119 \begin_layout Labeling
14120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14127 This is the Slanted font shape
14129 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14130 , this is different from italic).
14133 \begin_layout Labeling
14134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14138 \begin_inset space ~
14145 This is the Small caps font shape
14152 \begin_layout Labeling
14153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14158 Alters the text color.
14159 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14163 \begin_inset space ~
14168 , which means that the document default color set in
14170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14171 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14177 \begin_inset space ~
14182 is used, you can choose between
14259 \begin_inset Index idx
14262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14271 \begin_layout Labeling
14272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14277 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14278 the language of the document.
14279 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14280 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14282 \begin_inset Newline newline
14285 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14287 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14288 When using the spell checking (see section
14289 \begin_inset space ~
14293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14295 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14299 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14302 \begin_layout Labeling
14303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14308 Alters the size of the font.
14309 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14310 proportional to the document font size.
14311 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14312 the details, but a general description of what
14318 \begin_layout Labeling
14319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14340 arg "font-size tiny"
14346 \begin_layout Labeling
14347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14368 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14374 \begin_layout Labeling
14375 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14396 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14402 \begin_layout Labeling
14403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14424 arg "font-size small"
14430 \begin_layout Labeling
14431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14445 It's also the default size.
14449 arg "font-size normal"
14455 \begin_layout Labeling
14456 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14477 arg "font-size large"
14483 \begin_layout Labeling
14484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14505 arg "font-size larger"
14511 \begin_layout Labeling
14512 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14533 arg "font-size largest"
14539 \begin_layout Labeling
14540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14561 arg "font-size huge"
14567 \begin_layout Labeling
14568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14589 arg "font-size giant"
14595 \begin_layout Labeling
14596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14601 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14621 arg "font-size increase"
14627 \begin_layout Labeling
14628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14633 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 arg "font-size decrease"
14660 \begin_layout Standard
14665 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14666 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14668 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14669 — use those instead.
14670 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14673 \begin_layout Labeling
14674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14679 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14684 \begin_layout Labeling
14685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14692 This is text with emphasize on
14695 This might seem like the same as
14699 , but it is actually a bit different.
14705 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14707 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14710 \begin_layout Labeling
14711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14718 This is text with Underbar on.
14724 arg "font-underline"
14730 \begin_inset Newline newline
14735 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14736 when you could not change fonts.
14737 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14738 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14739 because some people
14743 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14746 \begin_layout Labeling
14747 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14751 \begin_inset space ~
14758 This is text with Double underbar on.
14764 arg "font-underunderline"
14768 \begin_inset Newline newline
14771 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14772 about double underbar.
14775 \begin_layout Labeling
14776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14787 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14793 arg "font-underwave"
14797 \begin_inset Newline newline
14800 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14801 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14804 \begin_layout Labeling
14805 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14809 \begin_inset space ~
14816 This is text with Strikeout on.
14822 arg "font-strikeout"
14826 \begin_inset Newline newline
14829 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14830 changed in the meantime.
14833 \begin_layout Labeling
14834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14838 \begin_inset space ~
14845 This is text with Cross out on.
14848 \begin_inset Newline newline
14851 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14854 \begin_layout Labeling
14855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14862 This is text with Noun on.
14869 , this is a logical attribute.
14870 Normally it's equivalent to
14873 \begin_inset space ~
14882 \begin_layout Standard
14883 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14884 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14886 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14888 \begin_inset space ~
14891 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14897 arg "dialog-show character"
14900 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14901 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14904 arg "textstyle-apply"
14908 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14912 \begin_layout Standard
14913 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14920 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14921 (suppose you just set the shape to
14922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14940 \begin_inset space ~
14952 \begin_layout Standard
14953 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14961 \begin_inset space ~
14973 \begin_layout Itemize
14979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14986 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15004 \begin_inset Newline newline
15008 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15022 \begin_inset Note Note
15025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15026 For more on phantoms see section
15027 \begin_inset space ~
15031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15033 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15043 \begin_inset Newline newline
15049 \begin_layout Itemize
15054 fonts use characters with serifs.
15055 These are the small
15056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15063 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15064 The following example shows the difference:
15065 \begin_inset Newline newline
15069 \begin_inset Newline newline
15074 text without serifs
15077 \begin_inset Newline newline
15080 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15081 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15088 \begin_layout Itemize
15093 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15094 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15095 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15098 \begin_layout Standard
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15106 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15107 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15110 \begin_inset space ~
15115 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15116 the property to be removed.
15117 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15118 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15119 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15137 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15138 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15146 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15150 \begin_inset space ~
15155 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15166 If you, for example, set
15167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15185 \begin_inset space ~
15190 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15199 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15202 \begin_layout Standard
15203 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15204 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15207 \begin_layout Section
15208 Printing and Previewing
15211 \begin_layout Subsection
15215 \begin_layout Standard
15216 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15217 using \SpecialChar LyX
15218 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15219 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15220 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15221 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15223 Additional Features
15228 \begin_layout Standard
15230 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15233 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15234 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15235 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15238 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15239 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15240 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15241 to turn your writing into printable output.
15242 This happens in two stages:
15245 \begin_layout Enumerate
15246 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15247 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15249 a file with the extension,
15250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15264 \begin_layout Enumerate
15265 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15266 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15267 to use the commands in the
15271 file to produce printable output.
15274 \begin_layout Subsection
15275 Output file formats
15276 \begin_inset Index idx
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15288 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15296 Simple text (ASCII)
15297 \begin_inset Index idx
15300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15301 File formats ! ASCII
15309 \begin_layout Standard
15310 This file type has the extension
15311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15323 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15327 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15334 \begin_layout Standard
15335 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15337 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15338 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15340 \begin_inset space ~
15346 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15347 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15348 bibliography (section
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15355 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15360 If your document includes such material, use
15362 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15363 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15369 \begin_inset space ~
15373 \begin_inset space ~
15381 \begin_inset space ~
15385 \begin_inset space ~
15391 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15392 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15398 \begin_inset Index idx
15401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15402 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15411 \begin_layout Standard
15412 This file type has the extension
15413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15424 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15428 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15429 -Errors or to process it manually
15430 with console commands.
15431 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15432 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15433 's temporary directory whenever you
15434 view or export your document.
15437 \begin_layout Standard
15438 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15439 -file using the menu
15441 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15442 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15446 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15447 export variants are explained in section
15448 \begin_inset space ~
15452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15454 reference "subsec:Export"
15461 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15463 \begin_inset Index idx
15466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15475 \begin_layout Standard
15476 This file type has the extension
15477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15497 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15498 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15499 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15503 \begin_layout Standard
15504 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15505 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15506 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15507 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15508 when you view the DVI.
15509 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15512 \begin_layout Standard
15513 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15515 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15516 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15521 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15522 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15524 \begin_inset space ~
15530 The latter option uses the program
15532 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15538 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15541 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15542 font access (see section
15543 \begin_inset space ~
15547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15549 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15554 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15555 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15562 \begin_inset Index idx
15565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15566 File formats ! PostScript
15574 \begin_layout Standard
15575 This file type has the extension
15576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15588 PostScript was developed by the company
15592 as a printer language.
15593 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15595 PostScript can be seen as a
15596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15599 programming language
15600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15603 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15608 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15615 \begin_inset Index idx
15618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15620 packages ! pstricks
15630 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15633 \begin_layout Standard
15634 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15638 Encapsulated PostScript
15639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15642 (EPS, file extension
15643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15655 As \SpecialChar LyX
15656 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15657 convert them in the background to EPS.
15658 If, for example, you have 50
15659 \begin_inset space ~
15662 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15664 \begin_inset space ~
15667 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15668 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15670 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15671 EPS to avoid this problem.
15674 \begin_layout Standard
15675 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15677 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15678 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15686 \begin_inset Index idx
15689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15696 \begin_inset Index idx
15699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15708 \begin_layout Standard
15709 This file type has the extension
15710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15726 Portable Document Format
15727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15734 was derived from PostScript.
15735 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15744 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15745 looks exactly the same.
15748 \begin_layout Standard
15749 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15753 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15757 (JPG, file extension
15758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15785 Portable Network Graphics
15786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15789 (PNG, file extension
15790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15802 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15803 converts them in the
15804 background to one of these formats.
15805 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15806 will slow down your workflow.
15807 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15810 \begin_layout Standard
15811 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15813 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15819 \begin_layout Description
15821 \begin_inset space ~
15824 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15828 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15831 \begin_layout Description
15833 \begin_inset space ~
15840 ) This uses the program
15842 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15845 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15848 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15851 is a new engine, derived from
15855 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15856 access (see section
15857 \begin_inset space ~
15861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15863 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15868 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15869 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15874 \begin_layout Description
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15883 ) This uses the program
15888 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15894 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15895 font access (see section
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15902 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15907 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15908 vertically written Japanese.
15911 \begin_layout Description
15913 \begin_inset space ~
15916 (cropped) This is the same as
15919 \begin_inset space ~
15924 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15925 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15926 to generate good-looking
15927 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15930 \begin_layout Description
15932 \begin_inset space ~
15935 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15939 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15943 \begin_layout Description
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15948 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15952 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15953 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15957 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15958 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15961 \begin_layout Standard
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15974 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15975 works without problems.
15976 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15977 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15981 \begin_inset space ~
15989 \begin_inset space ~
15994 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16004 \begin_inset Index idx
16007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16008 FileFormats ! XHTML
16014 \begin_inset Index idx
16017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16026 \begin_layout Standard
16027 This file type has the extension
16028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16040 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16041 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16042 When \SpecialChar LyX
16043 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16044 suitable for the purpose.
16045 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16047 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16048 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16051 between different formats, which are described in section
16053 Math Output in XHTML
16058 \begin_inset space ~
16066 \begin_layout Standard
16067 XHTML output remains
16068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16075 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16076 features are supported yet.
16080 and the World Wide Web
16084 Additional Features
16086 manual, for more information.
16089 \begin_layout Standard
16090 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16092 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16093 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16099 \begin_layout Subsection
16101 \begin_inset Index idx
16104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16113 \begin_layout Standard
16114 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16115 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16124 or use the toolbar button
16131 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16132 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16133 \begin_inset space ~
16137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16139 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16143 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16145 \begin_inset space ~
16149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16151 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16156 Further output formats can be selected via
16158 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16159 View (Other Formats)
16161 or the toolbar button
16170 \begin_layout Standard
16171 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16172 viewer window using the menu
16174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16179 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16180 Update (Other Formats)
16185 \begin_layout Standard
16186 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16189 To have a real output, export your document.
16192 \begin_layout Section
16193 A few Words about Typography
16194 \begin_inset Index idx
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16206 \begin_layout Subsection
16207 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16208 \begin_inset Index idx
16211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16218 \begin_inset Index idx
16221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16230 \begin_layout Standard
16231 In \SpecialChar LyX
16233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16244 symbol comes in four variants: the
16261 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16267 \begin_layout Standard
16268 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16278 height_special "totalheight"
16283 backgroundcolor "none"
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 \begin_inset Tabular
16288 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16289 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16290 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16291 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16292 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16293 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16294 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16322 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16362 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16363 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16385 system key combination
16389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16390 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16402 and the em dash with
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16418 is the Mac label for the right
16423 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514650349
16432 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514642633
16433 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16437 \begin_inset space ~
16440 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16452 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16453 and 2014 for the en dash).
16461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16474 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16497 system key combination or
16498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16512 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16564 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16570 \begin_layout Standard
16571 Dashes can also be inserted with
16573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16575 \begin_inset space ~
16578 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16582 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514890768
16586 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514650507
16588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16596 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514650506
16600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16607 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514650396
16608 with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014
16614 \begin_layout Standard
16615 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16616 mode and has a length of its own.
16617 Here are some examples:
16620 \begin_layout Enumerate
16621 line- and page-breaks
16622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16632 \begin_layout Enumerate
16634 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514642720
16638 \begin_inset space ~
16642 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514642746
16643 ; Oh – there's a dash.
16646 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16656 \begin_layout Enumerate
16657 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16658 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16668 \begin_layout Enumerate
16669 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16673 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16683 \begin_layout Standard
16685 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16687 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16688 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16696 \begin_layout Subsection
16697 Dashes and Line Breaks
16698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16700 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16707 \begin_layout Standard
16708 Whether line breaks
16709 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514642422
16711 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514890882
16714 dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale
16715 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514650654
16717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16725 \begin_layout Itemize
16726 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash
16727 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514642312
16728 in ranges of values such as 1975–1982
16730 , but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the
16734 \begin_layout Itemize
16735 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16739 \begin_layout Itemize
16740 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16741 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16744 \begin_layout Standard
16746 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514643928
16748 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891332
16752 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891353
16755 are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16756 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16758 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891361
16759 by default generally
16760 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891480
16762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16774 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891455
16778 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891448
16782 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891497
16785 en-dashes and em-dashes.
16786 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514643799
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16792 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514650817
16798 \begin_layout Enumerate
16800 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514652254
16801 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
16802 \begin_inset space ~
16805 – common in British English and generally recommended by
16807 The Elements of Typographic Style
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16813 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
16816 \begin_layout Enumerate
16817 Unwanted line breaks
16818 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514652276
16821 can be prevented by wrapping in a
16822 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891688
16824 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891688
16828 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891707
16835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16838 Prevent Hyphenation
16843 \begin_inset space ~
16854 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514652291
16855 , using protected spaces
16863 in \SpecialChar TeX
16869 \begin_layout Itemize
16871 \begin_inset space ~
16875 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16885 height_special "totalheight"
16890 backgroundcolor "none"
16893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16895 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891557
16899 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891614
16910 \begin_layout Itemize
16912 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514652372
16913 With spaced en dashes
16914 \begin_inset space ~
16918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16922 in British English and generally recommended by
16924 The Elements of Typographic Style
16927 \begin_inset space ~
16930 – line breaks should not occur before the dash.
16935 \begin_layout Itemize
16939 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514642994
16941 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16951 height_special "totalheight"
16956 backgroundcolor "none"
16959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16961 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514642994
16965 \begin_inset space ~
16974 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514642998
16976 \begin_inset space ~
16981 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16982 \begin_inset space ~
16985 – sont très utiles.
16988 \begin_layout Itemize
16995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17004 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17008 \begin_layout Standard
17009 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17010 \begin_inset space ~
17013 – in contrast to an overfull line
17014 \begin_inset space ~
17017 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17019 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891753
17023 \begin_layout Enumerate
17025 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514643500
17026 The default dashes output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17027 disable hyphenation in words adjacent to hyphens
17028 and ligature dashes.
17033 \begin_layout Standard
17034 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17039 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17040 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17041 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514653511
17046 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514653512
17052 \begin_layout Enumerate
17054 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891789
17055 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17056 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a Makebox
17057 inset or \SpecialChar TeX
17063 \begin_layout Itemize
17065 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514653363
17069 \begin_inset space ~
17072 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17073 \begin_inset space ~
17076 – sont très utiles.
17082 \begin_layout Enumerate
17084 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514644579
17085 In this case optional l
17086 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514644580
17090 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514646589
17094 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514646372
17100 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514644570
17103 allowed via the menu
17104 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891813
17106 \begin_inset Newline newline
17110 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514891815
17115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17116 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17117 Optional line break
17123 \begin_layout Itemize
17124 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17126 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514644634
17129 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17131 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514644706
17132 broken after the dash
17133 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514644714
17134 followed by a line break opportunity
17137 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514890478
17141 \begin_layout Standard
17143 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514890517
17144 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (cf.
17146 \begin_inset space ~
17150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17152 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17165 \begin_layout Enumerate
17167 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514653204
17168 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17169 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17178 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17190 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514646777
17191 Changes and backwards compatibility
17194 \begin_layout Standard
17196 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514646781
17199 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
17201 \begin_inset space ~
17205 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514653772
17206 you could insert en-dashes and em-dashes as -- and ---, respectively; they
17207 were automatically merged to proper (breakable) dashes in the output, but
17210 consecutive hyphen characters
17211 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514654314
17215 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514653785
17217 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514654235
17218 source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX
17222 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514653905
17224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17231 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
17232 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17242 \begin_layout Standard
17244 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514647104
17245 If you inserted literal dash characters, however, they were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17251 dashes (this was actually rather by accident than intentionally, but some
17252 used these two forms of dashes deliberately).
17254 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514646979
17258 \begin_layout Standard
17260 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514653950
17264 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514653959
17269 \begin_inset space ~
17273 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514655286
17274 things work differently: consecutive hyphens are merged to dashes immediately
17277 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514892048
17278 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17279 in a way that prevents
17280 ligation to dashes.
17282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17289 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
17294 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
17295 after the input (unless the current text font is
17305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17306 The behavior was changed since
17307 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514892102
17308 it led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
17309 , text export, HTML export and the PDF export
17310 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514892145
17312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17327 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output
17331 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514654876
17332 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
17333 as non-breakable dashes.
17334 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
17343 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514655286
17344 If you copy consecutive hyphens, by contrast, they are output as consecutive
17346 An unintended consequence of this change was that all dashes now were output
17347 as non-breakable dashes.
17348 Since furthermore, in order to maintain the output, occurrences of consecutive
17349 hyphens in documents that were saved by \SpecialChar LyX
17351 \begin_inset space ~
17354 2.1 or earlier versions, were converted to literal en- and em-dash characters,
17355 respectively, these were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17356 in \SpecialChar LyX
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17366 An obvious drawback of all this was that it resulted in different line
17367 breaks in some documents.
17369 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514891934
17373 \begin_layout Standard
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514688984
17381 , by contrast and as outlined above,
17388 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514654979
17390 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514655571
17391 , so if you load a document saved previous to LyX 2.2, you should get the
17392 identical output with LyX 2.3 for the dashes inserted with -- and ---.
17393 Furthermore, \SpecialChar LyX
17395 \begin_inset space ~
17398 2.3 provides the aforementioned option
17400 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17405 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17409 It is off by default but selected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17411 \begin_inset space ~
17414 2.2 in order to maintain line breaking between \SpecialChar LyX
17415 2.2 and 2.3 (so these document
17416 have non-breakable dashes).
17418 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514892224
17419 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17421 \begin_inset space ~
17424 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
17427 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17428 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17429 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17430 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17432 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
17433 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514655571
17435 \begin_inset Newline newline
17438 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
17442 \begin_layout Itemize
17444 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514649416
17445 If you used only literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17450 2.2 documents, you must manually select
17452 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17454 to ensure unchanged behavior.
17458 \begin_layout Standard
17460 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514892245
17467 If you used both literal and
17468 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514655424
17470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17478 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514655426
17481 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17483 \begin_inset space ~
17486 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17487 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17488 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514649416
17492 \begin_layout Itemize
17494 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514649416
17495 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
17496 documents that follow literal
17497 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17503 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
17504 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17509 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
17510 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514649439
17514 \begin_layout Subsection
17516 \begin_inset Index idx
17519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17528 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17535 \begin_layout Standard
17536 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17537 but automatically in the output.
17538 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17544 \begin_inset Index idx
17547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17554 following the rules of the document language.
17556 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514652600
17558 does not hyphenate text in the
17562 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17567 \begin_layout Standard
17569 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with
17570 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514652587
17577 unusual constructs, like
17578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17586 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17587 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17588 This is done with the menu
17590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17591 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17593 \begin_inset space ~
17599 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17601 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17605 \begin_layout Standard
17606 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17607 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17618 would then see the hyphen
17619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17627 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514649694
17629 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514649696
17634 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514649727
17636 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514649729
17639 at this point would look ugly.
17640 To prevent the shortcut from being
17641 \change_deleted -1402925745 1514649715
17643 \change_inserted -1402925745 1514649716
17646 , you can use a protected hyphen (
17648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17649 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17652 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17654 Prevent Hyphenation
17659 \begin_inset space ~
17667 \begin_layout Subsection
17669 \begin_inset Index idx
17672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17682 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17685 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17692 \begin_layout Standard
17693 When \SpecialChar LyX
17694 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17695 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17697 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17703 appropriate amount of space.
17704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17707 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17709 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17710 gets after another word.
17713 \begin_layout Standard
17714 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17715 not work in all cases.
17717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17728 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17729 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17732 \begin_layout Standard
17733 Here are some examples of
17737 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17740 \begin_layout Itemize
17745 \begin_layout Itemize
17750 \begin_layout Standard
17751 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17754 \begin_layout Itemize
17756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17760 this is too much space!
17763 \begin_layout Itemize
17768 \begin_layout Standard
17769 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17772 \begin_layout Standard
17773 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17776 \begin_layout Enumerate
17780 \begin_inset space ~
17785 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17786 \begin_inset space ~
17790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17792 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17797 \begin_inset Index idx
17800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17801 Spaces ! inter-word
17809 \begin_layout Enumerate
17813 \begin_inset space ~
17818 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17819 \begin_inset space ~
17823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17825 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17830 \begin_inset Index idx
17833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17842 \begin_layout Enumerate
17846 \begin_inset space ~
17850 \begin_inset space ~
17854 \begin_inset space ~
17861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 \begin_inset space ~
17868 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17869 This function is also bound to
17872 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17878 \begin_layout Standard
17879 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17882 \begin_layout Itemize
17884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17888 \begin_inset space \space{}
17891 this is too much space!
17894 \begin_layout Itemize
17895 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17899 \begin_layout Standard
17900 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17901 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17903 will take care of this.
17906 \begin_layout Standard
17907 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17911 \begin_inset space ~
17917 feature described in the section
17919 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17924 Additional Features
17929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17931 \begin_inset Index idx
17934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17935 Typography ! Quotation marks
17941 \begin_inset Index idx
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17945 Quotation marks | see
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17975 \begin_layout Standard
17977 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17978 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17979 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17989 The keyboard character,
17993 , generates this automatically.
17996 \begin_layout Standard
17997 You can specify what character the
18001 key produces by using the submenu
18007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18011 \begin_inset Index idx
18014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18015 Document ! Settings
18020 dialog and switching the
18024 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18025 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18027 \begin_inset space ~
18033 \begin_layout Labeling
18034 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18046 \begin_inset space ~
18050 \begin_inset space ~
18054 \begin_inset Quotes els
18058 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18072 \begin_inset Quotes els
18076 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18079 quotation marks (as common, e.
18080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18086 \begin_layout Labeling
18087 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18090 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18094 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_inset space ~
18106 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18110 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18116 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18120 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18124 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18128 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18131 quotation marks (as common, e.
18132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18138 \begin_layout Labeling
18139 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18142 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18146 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18150 \begin_inset space ~
18154 \begin_inset space ~
18158 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18162 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18168 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18172 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18176 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18180 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18183 quotation marks (as common, e.
18184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18190 \begin_layout Labeling
18191 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18194 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18198 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18206 \begin_inset space ~
18210 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18214 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18220 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18224 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18228 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18232 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18235 quotation marks (as common, e.
18236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18242 \begin_layout Labeling
18243 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18246 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18250 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18254 \begin_inset space ~
18258 \begin_inset space ~
18262 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18266 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18272 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18276 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18280 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18284 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18287 quotation marks (as common, e.
18288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18291 g., in Switzerland)
18294 \begin_layout Labeling
18295 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18298 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18302 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18306 \begin_inset space ~
18310 \begin_inset space ~
18314 \begin_inset Quotes als
18318 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18324 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18328 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18332 \begin_inset Quotes als
18336 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18339 quotation marks (as common, e.
18340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18346 \begin_layout Labeling
18347 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18350 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18354 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18358 \begin_inset space ~
18362 \begin_inset space ~
18366 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18370 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18376 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18380 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18384 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18388 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18391 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18394 \begin_layout Labeling
18395 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18398 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18402 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18406 \begin_inset space ~
18410 \begin_inset space ~
18414 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18418 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18424 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18428 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18432 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18436 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18439 quotation marks (as common, e.
18440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18443 g., in Great Britain)
18446 \begin_layout Labeling
18447 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18450 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18458 \begin_inset space ~
18462 \begin_inset space ~
18466 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18470 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18476 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18480 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18484 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18488 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18491 quotation marks (as common, e.
18492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18498 \begin_layout Labeling
18499 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18502 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18506 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18510 \begin_inset space ~
18514 \begin_inset space ~
18518 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18522 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18528 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18532 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18536 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18540 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18543 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18548 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18549 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18550 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18551 the inner marks differ).
18559 \begin_layout Labeling
18560 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18563 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18567 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18571 \begin_inset space ~
18575 \begin_inset space ~
18579 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18583 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18589 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18593 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18597 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18601 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18604 quotation marks (as common, e.
18605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18611 \begin_layout Labeling
18612 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18615 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18619 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18623 \begin_inset space ~
18627 \begin_inset space ~
18631 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18635 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18641 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18645 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18649 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18653 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18656 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18659 \begin_layout Labeling
18660 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18661 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18669 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18675 \begin_inset space ~
18679 \begin_inset space ~
18685 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18693 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18697 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18701 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18705 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18709 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18712 quotation marks (as common, e.
18713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18721 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18722 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18730 \begin_layout Labeling
18731 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18732 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18740 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18746 \begin_inset space ~
18750 \begin_inset space ~
18756 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18764 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18768 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18772 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18776 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18780 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18783 quotation marks (as common, e.
18784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18787 g., in North Korea and China)
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18792 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18793 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18801 \begin_layout Standard
18802 Inner quotation marks
18806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18807 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18808 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18809 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18817 does not necessarily mean
18818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18826 This is why we call them
18827 \begin_inset Quotes els
18831 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18847 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18849 \begin_inset Quotes els
18853 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18856 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18859 arg "quote-insert inner"
18864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18870 \begin_layout Standard
18871 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18872 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18873 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18874 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18875 If you check the setting
18877 Use dynamic quotation marks
18881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18882 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18885 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18886 they appear in a special color).
18887 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18888 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18893 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18896 \begin_layout Standard
18897 Individual quotation marks (i.
18898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18901 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18902 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18906 \begin_layout Subsection
18908 \begin_inset Index idx
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18912 Typography ! Ligatures
18918 \begin_inset Index idx
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18952 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18959 \begin_layout Standard
18960 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18961 print them as single characters.
18962 These groups are known as
18967 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18968 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18970 Here are the standard ligatures:
18973 \begin_layout Itemize
18977 \begin_layout Itemize
18981 \begin_layout Itemize
18985 \begin_layout Itemize
18989 \begin_layout Itemize
18993 \begin_layout Standard
18994 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18997 \begin_layout Standard
18998 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18999 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19007 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19023 To break a ligature, use
19025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19026 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19046 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19063 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19071 \begin_layout Subsection
19073 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19075 \begin_inset Index idx
19078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19092 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19096 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19099 \begin_layout Description
19101 The name of the game.
19104 \begin_layout Description
19106 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19110 \begin_layout Description
19112 The \SpecialChar TeX
19113 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19117 \begin_layout Description
19118 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19119 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19123 \begin_layout Standard
19124 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19130 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19138 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19139 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19140 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19141 converges to the number
19142 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19145 : The actual version is
19146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19154 , the previous one was
19155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19166 \begin_layout Subsection
19168 \begin_inset Index idx
19171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 \begin_layout Standard
19181 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19182 space between two words.
19183 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19193 for units use the menu
19195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19198 \begin_inset space ~
19206 arg "space-insert thin"
19212 \begin_layout Standard
19213 Here is an example to show the differences:
19216 \begin_layout Standard
19217 \begin_inset Tabular
19218 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19219 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19220 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19221 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19228 \begin_inset space ~
19232 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19244 space between number and unit
19251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19260 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19272 half space between number and unit
19285 \begin_layout Subsection
19287 \begin_inset Index idx
19290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19291 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19299 \begin_layout Standard
19300 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19302 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19303 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19304 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19305 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19306 These bits of text became known as
19317 \begin_layout Standard
19318 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19319 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19320 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19321 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19322 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19323 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19324 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19325 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19326 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19327 \begin_inset Newline newline
19335 \begin_inset Newline newline
19343 \begin_inset Newline newline
19346 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19347 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19348 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19350 \begin_inset space ~
19354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19356 key "latexcompanion"
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19373 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19374 's page break mechanism.
19377 \begin_layout Chapter
19378 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19381 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19388 \begin_layout Standard
19389 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19392 \begin_inset space ~
19398 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19401 \begin_layout Section
19403 \begin_inset Index idx
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19422 \begin_layout Standard
19424 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19427 \begin_layout Description
19430 \begin_inset space ~
19433 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19434 \begin_inset Newline newline
19438 \begin_inset Note Note
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19442 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19450 \begin_layout Description
19451 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19452 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19453 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19456 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19457 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19459 \begin_inset space ~
19465 \begin_inset Newline newline
19469 \begin_inset Note Comment
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19482 \begin_layout Description
19484 \begin_inset space ~
19487 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19488 set in the document settings under
19490 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19492 \begin_inset space ~
19498 \begin_inset Newline newline
19502 \begin_inset Newline newline
19506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19515 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19516 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19521 of a comment that appears in the output.
19527 \begin_inset Newline newline
19531 \begin_inset Newline newline
19534 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19537 \begin_layout Standard
19538 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19550 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19553 \begin_layout Section
19555 \begin_inset Index idx
19558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19567 name "sec:Footnotes"
19574 \begin_layout Standard
19576 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19582 or the toolbar button
19585 arg "footnote-insert"
19597 \begin_inset Graphics
19598 filename clipart/footnote.png
19607 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19608 's representation of your footnote.
19618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19637 label, the box will
19641 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19642 Clicking on the box label again will close
19655 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19656 and click on the footnote
19671 \begin_layout Standard
19672 Here is an example footnote:
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19689 \begin_layout Standard
19690 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19691 position where the footnote box is placed.
19692 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19693 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19694 according to the document class.
19696 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19697 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19703 ey are described in the
19706 \begin_inset space ~
19714 \begin_layout Section
19716 \begin_inset Index idx
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19728 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19735 \begin_layout Standard
19736 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19738 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19742 \begin_inset space ~
19747 or the toolbar button
19750 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19776 appearing within your text.
19777 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19778 's representation of your margin
19787 \begin_layout Standard
19788 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19792 \begin_inset Marginal
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 This is a marginal note.
19805 \begin_layout Standard
19806 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19807 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19808 pages, right on odd pages.
19811 \begin_layout Standard
19812 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19815 \begin_inset space ~
19823 \begin_inset space ~
19831 \begin_layout Section
19832 Graphics and Images
19833 \begin_inset Index idx
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 \begin_inset Index idx
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19855 name "sec:Graphics"
19862 \begin_layout Standard
19863 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19864 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19867 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19876 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19879 \begin_layout Standard
19880 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19885 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19886 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19888 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19889 \begin_inset space ~
19893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19895 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19902 \begin_layout Standard
19907 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19908 of the image in the output.
19909 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19913 \begin_inset space ~
19917 \begin_inset space ~
19926 \begin_inset space ~
19930 \begin_inset space ~
19934 \begin_inset space ~
19939 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19940 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19948 \begin_layout Standard
19952 \begin_inset space ~
19956 \begin_inset space ~
19961 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19962 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19964 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19969 \begin_inset space ~
19974 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19975 with the image size is printed.
19978 \begin_layout Standard
19979 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19980 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19982 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19985 \begin_layout Standard
19987 \begin_inset Graphics
19988 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19996 \begin_layout Standard
19997 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19998 the image into a float, see section
19999 \begin_inset space ~
20003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20005 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20012 \begin_layout Subsection
20014 \begin_inset Index idx
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20026 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20033 \begin_layout Standard
20034 You can insert images in any known file format.
20035 But as we explained in section
20036 \begin_inset space ~
20040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20042 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20046 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20048 therefore uses the program
20052 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20053 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20054 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20055 \begin_inset space ~
20059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20061 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20068 \begin_layout Standard
20069 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20072 \begin_layout Description
20074 \begin_inset space ~
20077 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20078 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20079 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20083 Graphics Interchange Format
20084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20087 (GIF, file extension
20088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20100 \begin_inset Index idx
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20135 Portable Network Graphics
20136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20139 (PNG, file extension
20140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20152 \begin_inset Index idx
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20187 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20191 (JPG, file extension
20192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20216 \begin_inset Index idx
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 \begin_layout Description
20252 \begin_inset space ~
20255 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20257 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20258 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20259 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20260 \begin_inset Newline newline
20263 Scalable image formats can be
20264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20267 Scalable Vector Graphics
20268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20271 (SVG, file extension
20272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20284 \begin_inset Index idx
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20319 Encapsulated PostScript
20320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20323 (EPS, file extension
20324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20336 \begin_inset Index idx
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20371 Portable Document Format
20372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20375 (PDF, file extension
20376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20388 \begin_inset Index idx
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20406 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20407 result will not be scalable.
20408 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20414 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20422 \begin_layout Standard
20423 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20430 \begin_layout Subsection
20431 Grouping of Image Settings
20432 \begin_inset Index idx
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 Images ! Settings grouping
20444 \begin_layout Standard
20445 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20447 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20448 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20450 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20451 need to manually change each of them.
20455 \begin_layout Standard
20456 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20459 \begin_inset space ~
20463 \begin_inset space ~
20475 \begin_inset space ~
20479 \begin_inset space ~
20485 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20486 and checking the name of the desired group.
20489 \begin_layout Section
20491 \begin_inset Index idx
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20510 \begin_layout Standard
20511 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20514 arg "tabular-insert"
20519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20523 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20524 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20525 from the rest of the table.
20526 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20527 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20529 Here is an example table:
20532 \begin_layout Standard
20534 \begin_inset Tabular
20535 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20536 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20537 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20538 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20539 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20540 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 \begin_layout Subsection
20744 \begin_layout Standard
20745 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20748 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20752 This brings up the table dialog.
20753 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20754 cursor is placed currently.
20755 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20756 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20757 done on all of your selection.
20760 \begin_layout Standard
20761 In addition to the table dialog, the
20764 \begin_inset space ~
20769 helps you in setting table properties.
20770 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20773 \begin_layout Standard
20777 \begin_inset space ~
20782 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20783 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20784 current cell respectively.
20785 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20787 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20788 of text, see section
20789 \begin_inset space ~
20793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20795 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20802 \begin_layout Standard
20803 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20804 using the check box
20813 This will merge the cells to
20817 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20818 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20819 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20820 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20821 in the last row without the upper border:
20824 \begin_layout Standard
20826 \begin_inset Tabular
20827 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20828 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20829 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20830 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20831 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20832 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 \begin_layout Standard
20964 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20965 -arguments for the table.
20966 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20967 explained in the chapter
20974 \begin_inset space ~
20980 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20981 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20982 but are visible in the output.
20985 \begin_layout Standard
20986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 Most DVI-viewers are
20998 able to display rotations.
21006 \begin_layout Standard
21011 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21016 adds lines for all cell borders.
21019 \begin_layout Subsection
21021 \begin_inset Index idx
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 Tables ! Multi-page
21031 \begin_inset Index idx
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 \begin_layout Standard
21044 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21047 \begin_inset space ~
21051 \begin_inset space ~
21059 \begin_inset space ~
21064 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21065 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21068 \begin_layout Description
21073 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21074 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21075 Except for the first page, if
21078 \begin_inset space ~
21086 \begin_layout Description
21090 \begin_inset space ~
21095 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21096 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21099 \begin_layout Description
21104 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21105 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21106 except for the last page, if
21109 \begin_inset space ~
21117 \begin_layout Description
21121 \begin_inset space ~
21126 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21127 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21130 \begin_layout Description
21131 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21132 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21138 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21141 \begin_inset space ~
21149 \begin_layout Standard
21150 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21151 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21152 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21158 In this context, first means first in this order:
21161 \begin_inset space ~
21173 \begin_inset space ~
21178 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21181 \begin_layout Standard
21183 \begin_inset Tabular
21184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21185 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21186 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21187 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21188 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21189 <row endfirsthead="true">
21190 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21201 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <row endfirsthead="true">
21221 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <row endhead="true">
21254 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <row endhead="true">
21285 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <row endfoot="true">
21318 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22835 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22866 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22897 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22928 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22959 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22990 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23083 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23114 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23145 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <row endlastfoot="true">
23300 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23311 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23337 \begin_layout Subsection
23339 \begin_inset Index idx
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23351 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23358 \begin_layout Standard
23359 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23360 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23361 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23362 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23366 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23369 \begin_layout Standard
23370 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23371 for the column in the table dialog.
23372 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23373 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23377 \begin_layout Standard
23379 \begin_inset Tabular
23380 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23381 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23382 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23383 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23529 This is longer now.
23534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23586 This is longer now.
23591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 \begin_layout Standard
23618 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23619 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23625 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23631 Selection with the mouse or with
23635 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23636 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23637 the selection from outside the table.
23640 \begin_layout Section
23642 \begin_inset Index idx
23645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23661 \begin_layout Subsection
23665 \begin_layout Standard
23666 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23667 have a fixed location.
23669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23676 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23684 \begin_inset space ~
23689 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23690 too many notes on the current page.
23693 \begin_layout Standard
23694 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23695 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23696 and pages without text.
23697 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23698 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23699 Floats are therefore numbered.
23700 Referencing is described in section
23701 \begin_inset space ~
23705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23707 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23714 \begin_layout Standard
23715 To insert a float, use the menu
23717 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23721 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23722 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23724 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23725 \begin_inset Index idx
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23734 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23735 paragraph within the float.
23736 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23737 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23738 left-clicking on the box label.
23739 A closed float box looks like this:
23740 \begin_inset Graphics
23741 filename clipart/float.png
23746 – a gray button with a red label.
23749 \begin_layout Standard
23750 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23752 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23755 \begin_layout Subsection
23757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23759 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23764 \begin_inset Index idx
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 Floats ! Figure floats
23776 \begin_layout Standard
23778 \begin_inset space ~
23782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23784 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23788 was created using the menu
23790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23791 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23797 arg "float-insert figure"
23801 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23810 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23814 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23815 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23817 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23819 \begin_inset space ~
23827 arg "layout-paragraph"
23833 \begin_layout Standard
23834 \begin_inset Float figure
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 \begin_inset Graphics
23842 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23857 name "fig:A-star-in"
23874 \begin_layout Standard
23875 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23876 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23887 ) and refer to it using the menu
23889 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23895 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23899 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23900 vague references like
23901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23908 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23909 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23919 For more about cross-references, see section
23920 \begin_inset space ~
23924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23926 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23933 \begin_layout Standard
23934 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23935 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23936 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23937 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23938 as described in section
23939 \begin_inset space ~
23943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23945 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23951 \begin_inset space ~
23955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23957 reference "fig:Two-images"
23961 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23962 You can also set the images one below the other.
23964 \begin_inset space ~
23968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23970 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23977 reference "fig:Star"
23981 are the subfigures.
23984 \begin_layout Standard
23985 \begin_inset Float figure
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23995 \begin_inset Float figure
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24006 name "fig:Undefinable"
24018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 \begin_inset Graphics
24020 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24032 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24036 \begin_inset Float figure
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24060 \begin_inset Graphics
24061 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24073 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24085 name "fig:Two-images"
24102 \begin_layout Subsection
24104 \begin_inset Index idx
24107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 Floats ! Table floats
24116 \begin_layout Standard
24117 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24120 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24123 or the toolbar button
24126 arg "float-insert table"
24130 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24131 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24132 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24134 \begin_inset space ~
24138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24140 reference "tab:Table-float"
24147 \begin_layout Standard
24148 \begin_inset Float table
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24159 name "tab:Table-float"
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 \begin_inset Tabular
24174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24175 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24329 \end{array}\right]$
24337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24350 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24371 \begin_layout Subsection
24373 \begin_inset Index idx
24376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24385 \begin_layout Standard
24387 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24388 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24389 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24391 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24399 \begin_inset space ~
24407 \begin_layout Section
24409 \begin_inset Index idx
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 \begin_layout Standard
24423 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24425 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24426 \begin_inset space \space{}
24433 \begin_layout Standard
24434 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24435 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24441 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24442 and its alignment within the page.
24445 \begin_layout Standard
24447 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24457 height_special "totalheight"
24462 backgroundcolor "none"
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 This is a minipage.
24469 The text is set in an italic style.
24472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24476 another formatting.
24484 \begin_layout Standard
24485 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24488 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
24492 as described in section
24493 \begin_inset space ~
24497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24499 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24504 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24510 \begin_layout Standard
24511 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24521 height_special "totalheight"
24526 backgroundcolor "none"
24529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24531 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24537 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24541 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24551 height_special "totalheight"
24556 backgroundcolor "none"
24559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24560 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24561 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24569 \begin_layout Standard
24570 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24576 \begin_layout Standard
24577 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24579 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24586 \begin_inset space ~
24594 \begin_layout Chapter
24595 Mathematical Formulas
24596 \begin_inset Index idx
24599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 \begin_inset Index idx
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24640 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24647 \begin_layout Standard
24648 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24653 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24656 \begin_layout Section
24658 \begin_inset Index idx
24661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 \begin_layout Standard
24671 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24684 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24686 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24687 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24688 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24696 \begin_layout Standard
24697 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24701 \begin_inset space ~
24706 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24709 \begin_layout Standard
24710 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24711 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24714 \begin_layout Standard
24715 This is a line with an inline formula
24716 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24722 \begin_layout Standard
24723 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24724 paragraph, like this one:
24725 \begin_inset Formula
24732 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24735 \begin_layout Standard
24737 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24739 For example, typing
24740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24753 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24754 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24758 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24761 \begin_inset space ~
24769 \begin_layout Subsection
24770 Navigating in Formulas
24771 \begin_inset Index idx
24774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24783 \begin_layout Standard
24784 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24785 achieved with the arrow keys.
24787 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24788 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24793 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24794 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24798 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24802 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24805 \end{array}\right]$
24813 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24818 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24819 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24822 \begin_layout Standard
24827 , printed in this document as
24828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24832 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24839 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24840 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24841 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24846 For example, if you want
24847 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24855 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24865 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24869 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24874 , since in the latter case only the
24877 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24882 will be under the square root sign:
24883 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24889 \begin_layout Standard
24890 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24892 \begin_inset Formula
24894 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24903 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24904 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24907 \begin_layout Subsection
24911 \begin_layout Standard
24912 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24913 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24917 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24918 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24919 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24920 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24921 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24925 \begin_layout Subsection
24926 Exponents and Subscripts
24927 \begin_inset Index idx
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24937 \begin_inset Index idx
24940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24949 \begin_layout Standard
24950 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24953 arg "math-superscript"
24959 arg "math-subscript"
24962 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24964 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24967 , type in a formula
24970 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24980 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24986 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24990 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24996 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25002 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25011 , you have to use an extra
25015 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25016 For example, if you want
25017 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25023 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25029 Subscripts are similar: To get
25030 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25036 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25044 \begin_layout Subsection
25046 \begin_inset Index idx
25049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 \begin_layout Standard
25059 Create a fraction either with the command
25065 or by using the icon
25068 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25074 \begin_inset space ~
25080 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25081 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25082 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25087 To move back up, press
25092 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25093 \begin_inset Formula
25095 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25098 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25106 \begin_layout Subsection
25108 \begin_inset Index idx
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 \begin_layout Standard
25121 Roots can be created using the
25124 \begin_inset space ~
25132 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25138 arg "math-insert \\root"
25160 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25166 always produces a square root.
25169 \begin_layout Subsection
25170 Operators with Limits
25171 \begin_inset Index idx
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 \begin_inset Index idx
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25193 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25200 \begin_layout Standard
25202 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25206 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25209 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25210 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25211 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25212 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25213 The sum operator will automatically place its
25214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25221 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25223 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25227 \begin_inset Formula
25229 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25234 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25238 \begin_layout Standard
25239 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25241 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25242 behind the operator and using the menu
25244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25245 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25247 \begin_inset space ~
25251 \begin_inset space ~
25265 \begin_layout Standard
25266 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25275 \begin_inset Index idx
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 \begin_inset Formula
25287 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25292 which will place the
25293 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25305 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25306 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25312 \begin_layout Standard
25313 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25320 Have a look at section
25321 \begin_inset space ~
25325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25327 reference "subsec:Functions"
25331 for an explanation of function macros.
25334 \begin_layout Subsection
25336 \begin_inset Index idx
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 \begin_layout Standard
25349 Most math symbols can be found in the
25352 \begin_inset space ~
25357 under one of several categories; including
25374 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25378 \begin_layout Standard
25379 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25380 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25381 don't have to use the
25384 \begin_inset space ~
25389 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25391 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25394 \begin_layout Subsection
25396 \begin_inset Index idx
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 \begin_layout Standard
25409 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25415 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25421 \begin_inset space ~
25429 arg "math-insert \\space"
25433 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25434 For example, the sequence
25439 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25442 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25444 \begin_inset Graphics
25445 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25450 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25451 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25452 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25453 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25454 , because they are negative
25456 Here are two examples:
25459 \begin_layout Standard
25469 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25475 \begin_layout Standard
25485 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25491 \begin_layout Subsection
25493 \begin_inset Index idx
25496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25505 name "subsec:Functions"
25512 \begin_layout Standard
25516 \begin_inset space ~
25521 contains under the button
25524 arg "math-insert \\functions"
25527 a number of function macros, such as
25528 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25532 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25540 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25547 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25548 avoid confusions, because
25549 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25553 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25559 \begin_layout Standard
25560 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25562 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25566 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25572 \begin_layout Standard
25573 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25574 are placed, as described in section
25575 \begin_inset space ~
25579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25581 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25588 \begin_layout Subsection
25590 \begin_inset Index idx
25593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 \begin_layout Standard
25603 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25605 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25606 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25607 commands, for example, to enter
25608 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25611 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25612 Our example is entered by typing
25617 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25624 \begin_inset space ~
25628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25630 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25634 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25637 \begin_layout Standard
25638 \begin_inset Float table
25643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25644 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25649 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25653 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25663 \begin_inset Tabular
25664 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25665 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25667 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25668 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25752 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25806 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25860 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25968 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26022 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26076 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26184 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26229 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26250 \begin_layout Standard
26251 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26254 \begin_inset space ~
26262 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26265 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26269 \begin_layout Section
26270 Brackets and Delimiters
26271 \begin_inset Index idx
26274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26281 \begin_inset Index idx
26284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26293 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26300 \begin_layout Standard
26301 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26303 For some purposes, using just the keys
26308 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26309 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26310 toolbar delimiter icon
26313 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26317 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26318 \begin_inset Formula
26320 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26328 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26329 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26333 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26336 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26342 \begin_inset Formula
26344 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26352 \begin_layout Standard
26353 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26354 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26358 \begin_layout Standard
26359 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26360 left side and right side.
26361 If you use the option
26364 \begin_inset space ~
26369 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26370 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26372 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26377 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26378 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26381 \begin_layout Standard
26382 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26383 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26384 is to go inside the brackets.
26385 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26390 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26391 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26392 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26396 arg "math-delim ( )"
26402 \begin_layout Section
26403 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
26404 \begin_inset Index idx
26407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 \begin_inset Index idx
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 \begin_inset Index idx
26427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26436 \begin_layout Standard
26437 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26441 \begin_inset space ~
26449 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26453 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
26454 Here is an example:
26455 \begin_inset Formula
26457 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26466 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26467 \begin_inset space ~
26471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26473 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26478 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26479 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26480 This alignment is set in the box
26485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26534 for every column as default.
26535 For example, the sequence
26536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26547 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26548 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26549 corresponds to the relevant column.
26550 The result will look like this:
26551 \begin_inset Formula
26554 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26555 column & has & has\,right\\
26556 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26565 \begin_layout Standard
26566 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26569 arg "newline-insert newline"
26572 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26573 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26575 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26578 or the math toolbar.
26581 \begin_layout Standard
26582 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26583 It can be created with the menu
26585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26586 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26588 \begin_inset space ~
26600 Here is an example:
26601 \begin_inset Formula
26615 \begin_layout Standard
26616 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26619 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26622 arg "newline-insert newline"
26626 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26631 arg "newline-insert newline"
26634 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26642 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26643 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26644 A new row is created by every further entry of
26647 arg "newline-insert newline"
26651 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26652 Here is an example:
26653 \begin_inset Formula
26655 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26656 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26661 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26662 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26663 \begin_inset Formula
26665 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26673 \begin_layout Standard
26674 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26681 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26682 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26685 reference "eq:asquared"
26690 The other types are described in section
26691 \begin_inset space ~
26695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26697 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26704 \begin_layout Section
26705 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26706 \begin_inset Index idx
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26710 Math ! Formula numbering
26716 \begin_inset Index idx
26719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26720 Math ! Referencing formulas
26726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26728 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26735 \begin_layout Standard
26736 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26738 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26739 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26741 \begin_inset space ~
26745 \begin_inset space ~
26753 arg "math-number-toggle"
26757 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26758 within parentheses.
26759 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26760 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26761 the document class.
26762 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26763 separated by a dot:
26764 \begin_inset Formula
26774 arg "math-number-toggle"
26777 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26778 You can only number displayed formulas.
26781 \begin_layout Standard
26782 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26784 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26785 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26787 \begin_inset space ~
26791 \begin_inset space ~
26799 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26802 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26803 \begin_inset Formula
26806 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26812 To number all lines use the shortcut
26815 arg "math-number-toggle"
26821 \begin_layout Standard
26822 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26825 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26826 A label is inserted with the menu
26828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26837 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26838 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26839 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26851 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26852 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26853 We inserted in the following example the label
26854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26861 in the second line:
26862 \begin_inset Formula
26864 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26865 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26870 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26871 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26872 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26876 \begin_inset space ~
26884 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26888 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26889 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26890 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26891 as the formula number:
26894 \begin_layout Standard
26895 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26898 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26905 \begin_layout Standard
26906 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26907 's cross-reference box are described in section
26908 \begin_inset space ~
26912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26914 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26919 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26927 \begin_layout Section
26928 User defined math macros
26929 \begin_inset Index idx
26932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26941 \begin_layout Standard
26943 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26944 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26945 Math macros are explained in section
26948 \begin_inset space ~
26960 \begin_layout Section
26964 \begin_layout Subsection
26966 \begin_inset Index idx
26969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26980 To set a font in a formula, use the
26983 \begin_inset space ~
26991 arg "math-insert \\font"
26994 , or enter its command, listed in table
26995 \begin_inset space ~
26999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27001 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27008 \begin_layout Standard
27009 \begin_inset Float table
27014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27015 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27020 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27024 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27034 \begin_inset Tabular
27035 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27036 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27070 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27097 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27124 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27157 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27184 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27211 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27245 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27272 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27306 \begin_layout Standard
27307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27315 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27331 \begin_layout Standard
27332 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27333 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27338 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27339 space when you need a space in the box.
27340 Here is an example where
27341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27352 denotes the set of numbers:
27353 \begin_inset Formula
27355 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27363 \begin_layout Standard
27364 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27365 You can, for example, put a character in
27374 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27378 \begin_inset Newline newline
27381 So it is better not to use this feature.
27384 \begin_layout Standard
27385 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27386 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27390 \begin_inset Newline newline
27393 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27399 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27400 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27406 \begin_layout Standard
27413 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27416 \begin_layout Standard
27417 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27420 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27422 \begin_inset space ~
27430 \begin_layout Subsection
27432 \begin_inset Index idx
27435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27444 \begin_layout Standard
27445 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27447 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27451 \begin_inset space ~
27455 \begin_inset space ~
27463 \begin_inset space ~
27471 arg "math-insert \\font"
27475 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27476 in black instead of blue.
27477 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27478 Here is an example:
27479 \begin_inset Formula
27482 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27483 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27492 \begin_layout Subsection
27494 \begin_inset Index idx
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27506 \begin_layout Standard
27507 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27508 automatically chosen in most situations.
27526 For most characters,
27534 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27535 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27540 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27541 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27542 thinks are appropriate.
27543 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27546 arg "math-insert \\style"
27550 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27551 For example, you can set
27552 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27555 , which is normally in
27564 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27568 The four styles are used in the following example:
27571 \begin_layout Standard
27572 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27576 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27580 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27584 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27590 \begin_layout Standard
27591 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27592 is set in a particular size with the menu
27594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27596 \begin_inset space ~
27601 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27602 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27603 will be adjusted to correspond.
27604 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27615 \begin_layout Standard
27619 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27625 \begin_layout Section
27626 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27628 \begin_inset Index idx
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27638 \begin_inset Index idx
27641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27650 \begin_layout Standard
27652 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27653 that are in common use.
27656 \begin_layout Subsection
27657 Enabling AMS-Support
27660 \begin_layout Standard
27661 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27662 the document by selecting the checkbox
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27673 \begin_inset space ~
27680 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27684 \begin_inset Index idx
27687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 Document ! Settings
27696 \begin_inset space ~
27702 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27703 -errors in formulas,
27704 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27707 \begin_layout Subsection
27709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27711 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27716 \begin_inset Index idx
27719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27720 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27728 \begin_layout Standard
27729 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27730 provides a selection of different formula types.
27732 allows you to choose between
27753 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27754 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27761 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27764 \begin_layout Chapter
27768 \begin_layout Section
27770 \begin_inset Index idx
27773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27782 name "sec:Cross-References"
27789 \begin_layout Standard
27790 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27791 's strengths is cross-references.
27792 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27794 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27795 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27796 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27799 \begin_layout Enumerate
27803 \begin_layout Enumerate
27804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27806 name "enu:Second-item"
27813 \begin_layout Enumerate
27817 \begin_layout Standard
27818 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27823 or by pressing the toolbar button
27830 A gray label box like this:
27831 \begin_inset Graphics
27832 filename clipart/label.png
27836 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27838 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27873 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27874 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27890 \begin_layout Standard
27891 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27896 or the toolbar button
27899 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27903 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27904 \begin_inset Graphics
27905 filename clipart/reference.png
27909 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27911 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27924 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27929 As an alternative to
27931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27934 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27939 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27940 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27942 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27954 \begin_layout Standard
27955 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27956 \begin_inset space ~
27960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27962 reference "enu:Second-item"
27969 \begin_layout Standard
27970 It is recommended to use a protected space
27974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 described in section
27976 \begin_inset space ~
27980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27982 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27991 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27992 line breaks between them.
27995 \begin_layout Standard
27996 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27999 \begin_layout Description
28000 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28003 reference "fig:Two-images"
28010 \begin_layout Description
28011 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28012 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28024 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28031 \begin_layout Description
28032 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28033 \begin_inset space ~
28037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28038 LatexCommand pageref
28039 reference "fig:Two-images"
28046 \begin_layout Description
28048 \begin_inset space ~
28052 \begin_inset space ~
28055 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28057 LatexCommand vpageref
28058 reference "fig:Two-images"
28063 \begin_inset Newline newline
28066 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28067 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28068 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28069 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28070 it prints “on the next page”.
28071 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28074 \begin_layout Description
28076 \begin_inset space ~
28080 \begin_inset space ~
28084 \begin_inset space ~
28087 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28090 reference "fig:Two-images"
28095 \begin_inset Newline newline
28098 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28104 ; otherwise it behaves like
28108 \begin_inset space ~
28112 \begin_inset space ~
28121 \begin_layout Description
28123 \begin_inset space ~
28126 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28127 \begin_inset Newline newline
28131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28149 \begin_inset Index idx
28152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 packages ! prettyref
28160 \begin_inset Index idx
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28165 packages ! refstyle
28176 \begin_inset Newline newline
28179 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28180 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28183 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28188 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28196 is the default and preferred because
28200 supports only English documents.
28201 The format is specified by using the command
28213 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28214 preamble of the document.
28215 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28233 \begin_inset Newline newline
28240 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28245 \begin_inset Newline newline
28256 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28257 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28259 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28260 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28265 , you might do so as follows:
28266 \begin_inset Newline newline
28273 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28278 \begin_inset Newline newline
28281 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28282 the package documentation
28283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28285 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28291 \begin_inset Newline newline
28302 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28309 \begin_layout Description
28311 \begin_inset space ~
28314 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28316 LatexCommand nameref
28317 reference "fig:Two-images"
28324 \begin_layout Description
28326 \begin_inset space ~
28329 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28330 label for the reference:
28331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28332 LatexCommand labelonly
28333 reference "fig:Two-images"
28338 \begin_inset Newline newline
28341 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28342 Code, if you want to issue a command
28343 that \SpecialChar LyX
28349 , then you may want to use the
28352 \begin_inset space ~
28357 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28367 This is the form needed for e.
28368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28372 \begin_inset space \space{}
28379 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28380 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28382 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28386 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28390 \begin_layout Standard
28391 You can only use the style
28395 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28399 is always possible.
28402 \begin_layout Standard
28403 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28404 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28406 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28407 \begin_inset space ~
28411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28413 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28421 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28425 \begin_inset space ~
28429 \begin_inset space ~
28434 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28435 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28438 \begin_inset space ~
28443 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28444 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28447 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28454 You can change labels at any time.
28455 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28456 do not need to think about this.
28459 \begin_layout Standard
28460 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28462 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28466 \begin_layout Standard
28467 References are described in detail in the section
28468 \begin_inset space ~
28478 \begin_inset space ~
28486 \begin_layout Section
28487 Table of Contents and other Listings
28488 \begin_inset Index idx
28491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28498 \begin_inset Index idx
28501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28502 Navigating ! Outline
28508 \begin_inset Index idx
28511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28527 \begin_layout Subsection
28529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28531 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28538 \begin_layout Standard
28539 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28542 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28544 \begin_inset space ~
28548 \begin_inset space ~
28554 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28556 If you click on it, the
28560 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28561 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28562 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28564 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28566 \begin_inset space ~
28571 that is described in section
28572 \begin_inset space ~
28576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28578 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28585 \begin_layout Standard
28586 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28587 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28589 \begin_inset space ~
28593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28595 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28599 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28601 \begin_inset space ~
28605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28607 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28611 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28613 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28616 \begin_layout Subsection
28617 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28620 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28627 \begin_layout Standard
28628 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28630 You can insert them via the
28632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28636 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28639 \begin_layout Section
28640 URLs and Hyperlinks
28641 \begin_inset Index idx
28644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28651 \begin_inset Index idx
28654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28663 \begin_layout Subsection
28665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28674 \begin_layout Standard
28675 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28683 \begin_layout Standard
28684 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28686 \begin_inset Flex URL
28689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28691 https://www.lyx.org
28699 \begin_layout Standard
28700 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28706 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28710 \begin_layout Standard
28711 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28719 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28728 \begin_layout Subsection
28730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28732 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28739 \begin_layout Standard
28740 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28745 or with the toolbar button
28752 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28761 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28762 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28763 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28765 name "LyX's homepage"
28766 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28771 , an Email address like this:
28772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28774 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28775 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28781 , or a link to a file.
28786 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28794 \begin_layout Standard
28795 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28808 to the link target.
28811 \begin_layout Standard
28812 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28813 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28814 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28815 the text style dialog.
28816 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28822 name "LyX's homepage"
28823 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28831 \begin_layout Standard
28832 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28836 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28839 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28843 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28845 \begin_inset Newline newline
28853 \begin_inset Newline newline
28860 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28863 \begin_layout Section
28865 \begin_inset Index idx
28868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28877 name "sec:Appendices"
28884 \begin_layout Standard
28885 Appendices are created with the menu
28887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28889 \begin_inset space ~
28893 \begin_inset space ~
28899 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28900 as the appendix part of the book.
28901 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28904 \begin_layout Standard
28905 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28906 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28907 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28908 and the subsection number.
28909 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28913 \begin_layout Standard
28915 \begin_inset space ~
28919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28921 reference "chap:Credits"
28926 \begin_inset space ~
28930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28932 reference "subsec:Export"
28939 \begin_layout Section
28941 \begin_inset Index idx
28944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28953 name "sec:Bibliography"
28960 \begin_layout Standard
28961 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28963 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28964 \begin_inset space ~
28968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28970 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28977 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28982 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28983 \begin_inset space ~
28987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28989 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28994 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28995 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28996 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29000 using a bibliography database.
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29004 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29005 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29009 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29010 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29011 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29012 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29013 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29016 \begin_layout Subsection
29017 The Bibliography Environment
29018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29020 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29027 \begin_layout Standard
29032 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29034 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29043 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29045 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29046 of ASCII characters only.
29050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29052 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29055 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29061 \begin_inset Newline newline
29065 \begin_inset Flex URL
29068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29070 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
29082 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29092 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29093 \begin_inset Newline newline
29100 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29101 the number of the entry.
29106 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29115 \begin_layout Standard
29116 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29121 or the toolbar button
29124 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29128 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29129 containing the available citations.
29130 Select one or more keys from the list and
29140 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29141 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29146 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29147 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29148 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29160 \begin_layout Standard
29164 Companion Second Edition
29167 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29169 key "latexcompanion"
29177 \begin_layout Standard
29178 The \SpecialChar LyX
29179 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29180 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29190 \begin_layout Standard
29191 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29198 \begin_inset Index idx
29201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29209 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29221 Author A and Author B(Year)
29222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29229 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29231 Then, if you select
29234 \begin_inset space ~
29239 in the document settings
29240 \begin_inset Index idx
29243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29244 Document ! Settings
29251 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29253 \begin_inset space ~
29259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29261 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29268 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29271 \begin_layout Standard
29272 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29275 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29277 \begin_inset space ~
29285 arg "layout-paragraph"
29289 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29292 \begin_layout Subsection
29293 Bibliography databases
29294 \begin_inset Index idx
29297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29298 Bibliography ! Databases
29304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29306 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29313 \begin_layout Standard
29314 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29320 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29322 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29323 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29328 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29330 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29331 your working field in a database.
29332 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29333 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29334 list for that document.
29335 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29339 \begin_layout Standard
29340 The database is a text file with the file extension
29341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29352 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29353 The format is explained in
29354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29361 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29365 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29371 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29372 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29373 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29375 \begin_inset Flex URL
29378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29380 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29388 \begin_layout Standard
29390 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29391 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29392 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29394 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29396 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
29397 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
29398 Those are addressed by
29403 \begin_inset Index idx
29406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29408 packages ! biblatex
29414 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29415 (although it has been significantly
29416 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29426 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29427 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29428 might conversely fail to correctly
29429 handle databases that use specific
29438 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
29442 \begin_layout Standard
29443 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29448 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
29450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29454 \begin_inset Index idx
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29458 Document ! Settings
29470 \begin_inset space ~
29475 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29484 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29486 \begin_inset Index idx
29489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29490 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29499 \begin_layout Standard
29500 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29508 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29510 \begin_inset space ~
29516 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
29517 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29525 Add bibliography to TOC
29527 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29532 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29533 in the document or just the cited references.
29536 \begin_layout Standard
29537 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29538 style file is a text file with the file extension
29539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29550 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29551 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29552 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29553 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29555 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29561 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29562 \begin_inset Newline newline
29566 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29568 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29578 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29583 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29587 \begin_layout Standard
29588 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29593 \begin_inset Index idx
29596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29597 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29603 \begin_inset Index idx
29606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29608 packages ! biblatex
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29617 Accessing a database via
29621 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29629 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29631 \begin_inset space ~
29637 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29638 you cannot select a
29643 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29647 \begin_layout Standard
29652 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29665 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29666 file (text file with the file extension
29667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29678 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29679 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29681 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29690 styles are not set in the
29693 \begin_inset space ~
29698 dialog, but in the document settings.
29699 \begin_inset Index idx
29702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29703 Document ! Settings
29708 However, in the dialog in the
29712 field, which is only visible if you use
29716 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29717 example how its heading will appear).
29718 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29723 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29733 \begin_layout Standard
29734 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29735 \begin_inset space ~
29739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29741 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29752 Bibliography Processors
29755 \begin_layout Standard
29756 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29757 uses a bibliography processor,
29758 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29759 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29760 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29762 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29763 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29766 \begin_layout Standard
29767 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29769 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29770 You can do this on a general level in
29772 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29773 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29774 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29777 or for individual documents in
29779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29780 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29784 The following variants are available by default:
29787 \begin_layout Description
29788 biber a specific, modern processor
29789 \begin_inset Index idx
29792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29799 developed exclusively for
29803 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29809 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29814 makes use of; if you use the
29818 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29825 \begin_layout Description
29826 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29827 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29828 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29832 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29835 \begin_layout Description
29836 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29837 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29841 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29845 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29849 features are supported.
29852 \begin_layout Standard
29853 By default (with the
29859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29860 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29873 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29874 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29875 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29878 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29879 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29892 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29893 -based bibliography styles).
29894 This should suit most needs.
29897 \begin_layout Standard
29898 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29899 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29900 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29905 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29906 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29907 You can adjust it in
29909 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29910 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29911 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29918 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29919 can add below the selection.
29920 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29921 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29927 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29943 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29945 These are explained in detail in section
29947 Customizing Bibliographies
29951 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29956 Additional Features
29961 \begin_layout Subsection
29963 \begin_inset Index idx
29966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29967 Bibliography ! Citation format
29973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29975 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29982 \begin_layout Standard
29983 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29988 \begin_inset space \space{}
29991 numerical citation (as
29992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29999 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30007 ) or author-year citations (as
30008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30017 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30021 \begin_layout Standard
30022 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30026 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30030 \begin_inset Index idx
30033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30034 Document ! Settings
30039 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30045 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30046 labels, is there to use
30049 \begin_inset space ~
30060 \begin_inset space ~
30065 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30068 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30075 \begin_layout Standard
30076 With a bibliography database (see
30077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30079 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30086 ) one has in contrary to the
30090 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30091 These style formats are available:
30094 \begin_layout Description
30096 \begin_inset space ~
30099 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30100 -based approached without any additional packages
30101 (simple numeric citations).
30104 \begin_layout Description
30105 Biblatex loads the package
30110 \begin_inset Index idx
30113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30115 packages ! biblatex
30120 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30122 Biblatex citation style
30126 Biblatex bibliography style
30129 Options to the package
30133 can be entered in the
30140 \begin_layout Description
30142 \begin_inset space ~
30146 \begin_inset space ~
30149 mode) loads the package
30153 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30154 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30166 behavior very closely.
30171 this option has some additional styles.
30176 styles are also supported by this variant.
30179 \begin_layout Description
30181 \begin_inset space ~
30184 (BibTeX) loads the package
30189 \begin_inset Index idx
30192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30199 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30202 \begin_layout Description
30204 \begin_inset space ~
30207 (BibTeX) loads the package
30212 \begin_inset Index idx
30215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30222 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30225 \begin_layout Standard
30234 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30236 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30245 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30247 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30248 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30250 Biblatex citation style
30253 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30259 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30263 \begin_layout Standard
30264 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30265 are available in the
30270 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30271 a name prefix such as
30272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30287 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30292 \begin_inset space \space{}
30296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30307 \begin_layout Standard
30308 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30314 \begin_inset space \space{}
30317 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30323 \begin_inset space \space{}
30327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30339 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30343 \begin_inset space ~
30351 \begin_inset space ~
30357 Here is a simple example where the text
30358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30362 \begin_inset space ~
30366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30369 appears after the reference:
30372 \begin_layout Quote
30374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30377 key "latexcompanion"
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30386 All styles except for
30390 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
30392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30400 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30404 \begin_layout Standard
30405 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30406 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
30407 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
30412 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
30413 multi-citation (so-called
30414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30417 qualified citation lists
30418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30424 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
30429 dialog will display three columns in the field
30436 \begin_inset space ~
30444 \begin_inset space ~
30452 \begin_inset space ~
30458 If you double-click on an item's
30461 \begin_inset space ~
30469 \begin_inset space ~
30474 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30477 General text before
30483 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30486 \begin_layout Section
30488 \begin_inset Index idx
30491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30507 \begin_layout Standard
30508 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30512 \begin_inset space ~
30517 or the toolbar button
30524 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30525 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30526 by \SpecialChar LyX
30527 as the index entry.
30530 \begin_layout Standard
30531 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30534 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30536 \begin_inset space ~
30542 A light blue box labeled
30543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30554 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30555 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30561 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30562 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30563 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30565 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30567 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30575 \begin_layout Subsection
30576 Grouping Index Entries
30577 \begin_inset Index idx
30580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30590 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30592 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30593 lists under the entry
30594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30602 First we create the entry
30603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30611 \begin_inset space ~
30615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30617 reference "subsec:Lists"
30622 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30623 \begin_inset space ~
30627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30629 reference "sec:Itemize"
30633 , we insert the command
30636 \begin_layout Standard
30642 \begin_layout Standard
30646 \begin_layout Standard
30652 \begin_layout Standard
30653 for the enumerated list in section
30654 \begin_inset space ~
30658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30660 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30667 \begin_layout Standard
30668 The exclamation mark
30669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30676 marks the grouping levels.
30677 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30678 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30679 If we don't have an index entry for
30680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30687 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30690 \begin_layout Subsection
30692 \begin_inset Index idx
30695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30696 Index ! Page ranges
30704 \begin_layout Standard
30705 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30707 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30708 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30709 an index entry in section
30710 \begin_inset space ~
30714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30716 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30723 \begin_layout Standard
30726 Paragraph environments|(
30729 \begin_layout Standard
30730 and another entry at the end of section
30731 \begin_inset space ~
30735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30737 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30744 \begin_layout Standard
30747 Paragraph environments|)
30750 \begin_layout Standard
30752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30775 respectively start and end the index range.
30776 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30777 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30778 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30779 An example is the index entry
30780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30783 Document ! Settings
30784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30790 \begin_layout Subsection
30792 \begin_inset Index idx
30795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30796 Index ! Cross referencing
30804 \begin_layout Standard
30805 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30806 We referred for example in the index entry
30807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30821 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30825 ) to the index entry
30826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30833 in the same section using the entry
30836 \begin_layout Standard
30839 GIF|see{Image formats}
30842 \begin_layout Standard
30843 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30845 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30846 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30849 \begin_layout Subsection
30851 \begin_inset Index idx
30854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30855 Index ! Entry order
30863 \begin_layout Standard
30864 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30865 follow the rules for the index order.
30866 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30872 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30874 \begin_inset space ~
30878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30880 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30889 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30890 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30915 \begin_inset Index idx
30918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 Dummy entries ! maïs
30925 \begin_inset Index idx
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 Dummy entries ! maître
30935 \begin_inset Index idx
30938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30939 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30944 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30945 maïs, maison, maître.
30946 To achieve this, we use the command
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30952 previous entry@current entry
30955 \begin_layout Standard
30956 In our case we want to have
30957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30972 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30975 \begin_layout Standard
30981 \begin_layout Standard
30982 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30983 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30985 See the next subsection for an example.
30988 \begin_layout Subsection
30990 \begin_inset Index idx
30993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30994 Index ! Entry layout
31002 \begin_layout Standard
31003 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31004 \begin_inset Index idx
31007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31010 This is an italic dummy entry
31015 You can also format the page number using the character
31016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31023 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31024 -command without a backslash.
31025 We can write for example
31028 \begin_layout Standard
31031 italic page number:|textit
31034 \begin_layout Standard
31035 to get the page number in italic.
31036 \begin_inset Index idx
31039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31040 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31045 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31046 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31070 Have a look at section
31071 \begin_inset space ~
31075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31077 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31081 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31085 \begin_layout Standard
31086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31094 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31098 to generate the index, see section
31099 \begin_inset space ~
31103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31105 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31114 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31119 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31120 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31123 key "latexcompanion"
31136 \begin_layout Standard
31137 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31139 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31140 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31141 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31142 If so, put the following in the preamble
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31157 \begin_layout Standard
31161 \begin_layout Standard
31167 \begin_layout Standard
31168 in the index entry.
31169 \begin_inset Index idx
31172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31178 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31179 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31180 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31183 \begin_layout Standard
31184 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31185 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31186 a bold font for all index entries.
31187 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31199 documentation for details,
31200 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31202 key "makeindex,xindy"
31210 \begin_layout Subsection
31212 \begin_inset Index idx
31215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31224 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31231 \begin_layout Standard
31232 If the index generation program
31236 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31237 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31241 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31242 distribution, is used.
31246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31251 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31252 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31253 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31254 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31255 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31265 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31267 dialog, see section
31268 \begin_inset space ~
31272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31274 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31279 The available options are listed and explained in
31280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31282 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31288 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31292 \begin_layout Standard
31293 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31294 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31298 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31302 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31303 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31306 \begin_layout Subsection
31310 \begin_layout Standard
31311 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31312 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31320 next to the standard index.
31322 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31323 that add this feature.
31330 \begin_inset Index idx
31333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31335 packages ! splitidx
31340 package to generate multiple indexes.
31341 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31347 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31349 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31357 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31358 style, but it also includes
31359 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31360 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31368 \begin_layout Standard
31369 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31370 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31376 and select the option
31378 Use multiple Indexes
31385 already contains the standard index
31386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31394 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31395 also appear as a heading) to the
31399 input field and press the
31404 The new index now also appears in the list.
31405 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31406 label color to the new index.
31409 \begin_layout Standard
31410 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31420 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31421 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31422 are additional features:
31425 \begin_layout Itemize
31426 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31427 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31430 \begin_layout Itemize
31431 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31432 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31437 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31438 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31439 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31440 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31443 \begin_layout Itemize
31448 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
31449 code in the name of the index.
31452 \begin_layout Section
31453 Nomenclature/Glossary
31454 \begin_inset Index idx
31457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31464 \begin_inset Index idx
31467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31498 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31505 \begin_layout Standard
31506 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31507 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31508 called nomenclature or glossary.
31511 \begin_layout Standard
31512 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31519 \begin_inset Index idx
31522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31530 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31539 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31543 \begin_layout Standard
31544 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31545 and then use the menu
31547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31553 \begin_inset space ~
31558 or the toolbar button
31561 arg "nomencl-insert"
31566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31577 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31580 \begin_layout Standard
31581 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31582 The first is the term or
31586 that you wish to define.
31591 of the term or symbol.
31594 \begin_layout Standard
31595 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31603 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31604 code for nomenclature entries the option
31608 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31616 \begin_layout Subsection
31617 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31618 \begin_inset Index idx
31621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31622 Nomenclature ! Layout
31630 \begin_layout Standard
31631 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31635 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31642 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31650 \begin_inset Newline newline
31658 \begin_inset Newline newline
31664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31671 character starts/ends the formula.
31672 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31673 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31685 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31695 \begin_layout Standard
31696 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31697 syntax is given in section
31698 \begin_inset space ~
31702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31704 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31711 \begin_layout Standard
31715 \begin_inset space ~
31720 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31722 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31727 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31734 in this document is:
31735 \begin_inset Newline newline
31740 dummy entry for the character
31745 \begin_inset Newline newline
31757 \begin_inset space ~
31767 font use the command
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31802 \begin_inset space \space{}
31806 \begin_inset Newline newline
31822 \begin_inset Newline newline
31825 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31826 This command will make the font of all symbols
31833 \begin_inset space ~
31841 \begin_layout Standard
31842 If the characters |
31843 \begin_inset space \space{}
31847 \begin_inset space \space{}
31851 \begin_inset space \space{}
31855 \begin_inset space \space{}
31859 \begin_inset space \space{}
31862 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31863 code they need to be escaped
31864 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31865 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31866 LatexCommand nomenclature
31867 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31868 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31876 \begin_layout Subsection
31877 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31878 \begin_inset Index idx
31881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31882 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31892 -code of the symbol
31894 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31896 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31899 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31900 LatexCommand nomenclature
31902 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31910 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31914 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31915 LatexCommand nomenclature
31918 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31924 They will be sorted by
31925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31951 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31954 will be sorted before the
31958 since the character
31959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31966 is considered in sorting.
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31970 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31973 \begin_inset space ~
31978 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31979 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31981 For the example given, you can insert
31985 in this field for the
31986 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31993 will be located before
31994 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32001 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32016 \begin_layout Subsection
32017 Nomenclature Options
32018 \begin_inset Index idx
32021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32022 Nomenclature ! Options
32028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32030 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32037 \begin_layout Standard
32042 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32043 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32046 \begin_layout Description
32047 refeq Appends the phrase
32048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32063 to every nomenclature entry, where
32069 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32072 \begin_layout Description
32073 refpage Appends the phrase
32074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32089 to every nomenclature entry, where
32095 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32098 \begin_layout Description
32099 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32102 \begin_layout Standard
32103 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32104 class options list in the
32106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32110 In this document the options
32117 \begin_layout Standard
32118 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32124 \begin_layout Standard
32125 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32126 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32131 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32134 \begin_layout Description
32144 \begin_layout Description
32147 nomrefpage Like the
32154 \begin_layout Description
32157 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32166 \begin_layout Description
32170 \begin_inset space ~
32176 \begin_inset space ~
32181 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32184 \begin_layout Standard
32186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32193 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32194 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32198 \begin_layout Standard
32207 \begin_inset Newline newline
32213 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32217 \begin_inset space ~
32229 unskip, see equation
32232 \begin_inset Newline newline
32239 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32240 \begin_inset Newline newline
32246 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32250 \begin_inset space ~
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32268 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32271 \begin_inset space ~
32276 in the document settings under
32279 \begin_inset space ~
32287 \begin_layout Standard
32295 \begin_inset Newline newline
32299 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32303 \begin_inset space ~
32315 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32317 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32318 \begin_inset Newline newline
32325 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32326 \begin_inset Newline newline
32330 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32334 \begin_inset space ~
32346 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
32351 \begin_layout Subsection
32352 Printing the Nomenclature
32353 \begin_inset Index idx
32356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32357 Nomenclature ! Printing
32365 \begin_layout Standard
32366 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32369 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32385 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32386 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32387 You can choose between these settings:
32390 \begin_layout Description
32391 Default a space of 1
32392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32398 \begin_layout Description
32400 \begin_inset space ~
32404 \begin_inset space ~
32407 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32410 \begin_layout Description
32411 Custom custom space
32414 \begin_layout Standard
32415 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32424 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32432 For example, in order to change the name to
32436 , add the following line to the preamble:
32439 \begin_layout Standard
32447 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32450 \begin_layout Subsection
32451 Nomenclature Program
32452 \begin_inset Index idx
32455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32456 Nomenclature ! Program
32462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32464 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32471 \begin_layout Standard
32477 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32478 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32480 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32485 by adding options, see section
32486 \begin_inset space ~
32490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32492 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32497 The available options are listed and explained in
32498 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32500 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32508 \begin_layout Section
32510 \begin_inset Index idx
32513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32520 \begin_inset Index idx
32523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32524 Document ! Branches
32530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32532 name "sec:Branches"
32539 \begin_layout Standard
32540 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32541 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32542 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32543 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32546 \begin_layout Standard
32547 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32548 allows you to put text into branches.
32549 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32550 To create a branch, either select the menu
32552 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32553 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32556 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32558 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32565 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32566 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32567 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32568 and whether the name of the branch should
32569 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32570 (see below for an example).
32571 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32572 to the name of the other) and to add
32573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32585 \begin_inset space ~
32588 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32589 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32592 \begin_layout Standard
32593 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32594 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32599 where you can choose a branch.
32600 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32604 \begin_layout Standard
32605 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32606 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32609 \begin_layout Standard
32610 \begin_inset Branch Question
32614 \begin_layout Standard
32619 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32627 \begin_layout Standard
32628 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32632 \begin_layout Standard
32637 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32645 \begin_layout Standard
32652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32653 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32656 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32657 Consider for example a file
32658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32665 which has the above branches.
32667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32674 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32698 branch were inactive,
32699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32714 branch was active, likewise
32715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32730 branch was active, and
32731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32734 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32738 if both branches were active.
32739 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32740 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32746 \begin_layout Standard
32747 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32753 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32754 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32758 \begin_inset space ~
32766 \begin_layout Standard
32767 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32771 \begin_layout Standard
32777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32784 branch is deactivated.
32790 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32796 \begin_layout Standard
32797 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32798 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32799 definitions for each branch.
32800 For example you can define for the question branch
32804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32805 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32806 -syntax, see section
32807 \begin_inset space ~
32811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32813 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32825 \begin_layout Standard
32835 \begin_layout Standard
32845 \begin_layout Standard
32846 and for the answer branch
32849 \begin_layout Standard
32859 \begin_layout Standard
32869 \begin_layout Standard
32870 \begin_inset Branch Question
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32906 \begin_layout Standard
32907 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32911 \begin_layout Standard
32915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32943 \begin_layout Standard
32944 Now it is possible to use the
32948 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32955 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32958 commands to obtain conditional output.
32959 Here is an example formula where only the
32966 \begin_inset Formula
32968 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32976 \begin_layout Standard
32977 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32985 \begin_layout Standard
32986 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32992 \begin_inset space \space{}
32995 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32997 For this advanced usage, see the
33003 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33008 \begin_layout Section
33010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33012 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33017 \begin_inset Index idx
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33029 \begin_layout Standard
33032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33033 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33036 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33038 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33044 \begin_inset Index idx
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33049 packages ! hyperref
33054 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33055 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33056 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33057 part of the document.
33061 \begin_layout Standard
33062 The header information in the dialog tab
33066 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33067 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33068 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33069 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33073 \begin_inset space ~
33077 \begin_inset space ~
33082 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33083 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33084 and author entries.
33088 \begin_inset space ~
33092 \begin_inset space ~
33096 \begin_inset space ~
33101 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33104 \begin_layout Standard
33105 You can specify in the dialog tab
33109 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33114 \begin_inset space ~
33118 \begin_inset space ~
33122 \begin_inset space ~
33127 option allows long links to be split;
33130 \begin_inset space ~
33134 \begin_inset space ~
33138 \begin_inset space ~
33146 \begin_inset space ~
33151 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33154 \begin_inset space ~
33159 colors the different links.
33160 The default colors are:
33163 \begin_layout Labeling
33164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33169 for hyperlinks and URLs
33172 \begin_layout Labeling
33173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33181 \begin_layout Labeling
33182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33190 \begin_layout Standard
33191 but you can change these in the field
33196 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33199 \begin_layout Standard
33202 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33210 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33211 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33212 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33220 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33221 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33222 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33232 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33233 when opening the PDF.
33235 \begin_inset space ~
33238 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33242 1 will only display the sections.
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33246 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33247 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33253 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33264 \begin_layout Section
33266 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33270 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33277 \begin_layout Subsection
33280 \begin_inset Index idx
33283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33293 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33300 \begin_layout Standard
33301 As \SpecialChar LyX
33302 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33303 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33304 commands and constructs,
33307 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33308 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33309 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33310 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33311 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33312 cannot support all packages and
33316 \begin_layout Standard
33317 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33318 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33319 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33323 Code box is created by the menu
33325 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33327 \begin_inset space ~
33332 or by the toolbar button
33345 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33353 \begin_layout Standard
33354 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33356 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33358 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33363 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33368 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33375 , you can write the command part
33381 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33382 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33386 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33387 Code box behind the word.
33388 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33389 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33393 \begin_layout Standard
33394 \begin_inset Graphics
33395 filename clipart/ERT.png
33403 \begin_layout Standard
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33408 This is a line with a
33412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33435 \begin_layout Standard
33436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33444 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33445 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33446 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33447 know that the command is finished.
33455 \begin_layout Subsection
33456 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33458 \begin_inset Argument 1
33461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33462 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33469 \begin_inset Index idx
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33482 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33489 \begin_layout Standard
33490 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33491 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33492 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33493 uses in the background.
33494 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33495 is based on commands, you can
33496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33504 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33505 any time if you know the right commands.
33506 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33507 is the end of the day.
33508 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33509 all caption labels bold.
33510 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33512 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33516 \begin_layout Standard
33517 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33519 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33521 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33524 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33534 \begin_layout Standard
33535 As result you find that the package
33540 \begin_inset Index idx
33543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33551 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33556 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33560 \begin_inset space ~
33568 \begin_layout Standard
33573 usepackage[options]{package name}
33576 \begin_layout Standard
33577 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33578 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33579 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33580 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33583 \begin_layout Standard
33584 In your case the package name is
33589 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33594 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33595 So you add the command
33598 \begin_layout Standard
33603 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33606 \begin_layout Standard
33607 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33612 For more commands provided by the
33616 package, have a look at its documentation,
33617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33632 \begin_layout Standard
33633 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33635 For example if you use a
33639 class, you don't need the package
33643 , you can instead write
33646 \begin_layout Standard
33651 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33656 \begin_layout Standard
33657 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33658 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33659 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33666 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33669 \begin_layout Standard
33670 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33671 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33673 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33674 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33675 Code box as described in the previous
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33680 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33681 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33686 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33694 \begin_layout Standard
33695 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33701 \begin_layout Standard
33705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33715 \begin_inset Note Note
33718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33719 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33727 \begin_layout Left Header
33728 \begin_inset Argument 1
33731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 \begin_inset Note Note
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33755 defines the header line as described below
33763 \begin_layout Center Header
33764 \begin_inset Argument 1
33767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33776 \begin_layout Right Header
33777 \begin_inset Argument 1
33780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33801 \begin_layout Left Footer
33802 \begin_inset Argument 1
33805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33826 \begin_layout Center Footer
33827 \begin_inset Argument 1
33830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33842 \begin_inset Newline newline
33846 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33852 \begin_layout Right Footer
33853 \begin_inset Argument 1
33856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33878 \begin_layout Section
33879 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33882 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33887 \begin_inset Index idx
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 Document ! Header/Footer line
33897 \begin_inset Index idx
33900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 \begin_layout Standard
33910 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33931 \begin_inset space ~
33937 As a second step add in the menu
33939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33940 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33949 Custom Header/Footerlines
33952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33956 This module offers the following 6
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33963 \begin_layout Description
33965 \begin_inset space ~
33969 \begin_inset space ~
33973 \begin_inset space ~
33977 \begin_inset space ~
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33987 \begin_layout Description
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33993 \begin_inset space ~
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34011 \begin_layout Standard
34012 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34013 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34016 \begin_layout Standard
34017 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34018 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34020 \begin_inset space ~
34024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34026 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34030 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34033 \begin_layout Standard
34034 \begin_inset Float figure
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34043 \begin_inset Tabular
34044 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34045 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34046 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34047 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34048 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34068 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34097 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34108 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34112 The normal text on the page goes here.
34113 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34115 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34116 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34121 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34130 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34141 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34170 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34188 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34206 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34211 name "fig:Page-layout"
34215 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34228 \begin_layout Standard
34229 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34237 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34246 is set to “Default”.
34247 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34256 \begin_layout Subsection
34260 \begin_layout Standard
34261 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34262 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34263 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34264 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34266 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34268 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34271 \begin_layout Standard
34272 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34273 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34279 \begin_inset space ~
34287 \begin_layout Description
34290 thepage prints the current page number
34293 \begin_layout Description
34296 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34299 \begin_layout Description
34302 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34305 \begin_layout Description
34308 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34309 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34316 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34319 because it usually goes in a left header.
34322 \begin_layout Description
34325 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34326 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34328 It is normally used in the right header.
34331 \begin_layout Subsection
34332 Default header/footer
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34336 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34337 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34338 footer has the page number.
34339 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34340 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34341 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34352 \begin_layout Subsection
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34358 Some pages are different.
34359 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34360 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34361 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34362 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34363 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34367 Header and footer decoration line
34370 \begin_layout Standard
34371 By default, you get a 0.4
34372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34375 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34376 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34388 in the following way:
34391 \begin_layout Standard
34398 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34401 \begin_layout Standard
34402 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34415 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34425 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34426 \begin_inset space ~
34430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34441 Several header/footer lines
34444 \begin_layout Standard
34445 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34446 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34447 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34449 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34465 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34467 \begin_inset space ~
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34482 headheight}{height}
34485 \begin_layout Standard
34490 is a size in standard units (e.
34491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34495 \begin_inset space \space{}
34503 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34504 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34505 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34506 logfile with the menu
34508 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34510 \begin_inset space ~
34518 \begin_inset space ~
34523 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34528 \begin_inset Index idx
34531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34533 packages ! fancyhdr
34539 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34540 for your header/footer.
34543 \begin_layout Subsection
34547 \begin_layout Standard
34548 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34549 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34550 This example consists of the following definition:
34553 \begin_layout Description
34555 \begin_inset space ~
34564 , empty optional argument
34567 \begin_layout Description
34569 \begin_inset space ~
34572 Header empty, empty optional argument
34575 \begin_layout Description
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34586 in the optional argument
34589 \begin_layout Description
34591 \begin_inset space ~
34600 in the optional argument
34603 \begin_layout Description
34605 \begin_inset space ~
34618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34622 \begin_inset Newline newline
34626 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34633 in the optional argument
34636 \begin_layout Description
34638 \begin_inset space ~
34647 , empty optional argument
34650 \begin_layout Description
34653 headrulewidth set to 2
34654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34660 \begin_layout Standard
34661 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34662 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34678 \begin_layout Standard
34679 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34685 \begin_layout Standard
34689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34693 pagestyle{headings}
34699 \begin_inset Note Note
34702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34703 switches back to page style with the default headings
34711 \begin_layout Section
34712 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34715 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34720 \begin_inset Index idx
34723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34730 \begin_inset Index idx
34733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34742 \begin_layout Standard
34744 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34745 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34746 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34749 \begin_layout Subsection
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34754 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34760 \begin_inset Index idx
34763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34765 packages ! preview-latex
34770 (on some systems named simply
34775 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34777 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34784 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34786 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34794 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34795 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34796 -package are automatically
34797 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34801 \begin_layout Subsection
34805 \begin_layout Standard
34806 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34807 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34809 activate the option
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34819 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34829 \begin_inset space ~
34832 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34839 \begin_inset space ~
34852 \begin_inset space ~
34857 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34860 \begin_layout Standard
34861 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34866 \begin_inset space ~
34874 \begin_inset space ~
34882 \begin_layout Standard
34883 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34884 and when you finish
34888 \begin_layout Standard
34889 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34897 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34898 generated by activating the option
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34907 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34915 \begin_layout Subsection
34916 Selected document parts
34919 \begin_layout Standard
34920 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34921 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34922 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34923 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34925 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34931 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34932 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34933 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34936 \begin_layout Standard
34937 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34944 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34956 is explained in section
34958 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34973 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34974 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34975 the final rotated boxes,
34976 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34977 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34979 Here is the result:
34982 \begin_layout Standard
34983 \begin_inset Preview
34985 \begin_layout Standard
34990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34994 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35000 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35010 height_special "totalheight"
35015 backgroundcolor "none"
35018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35043 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35049 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35072 Previewing works also for colors.
35073 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35092 is explained in section
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 \begin_inset Preview
35115 \begin_layout Standard
35119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35138 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35143 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35162 \begin_layout Standard
35163 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35169 \begin_layout Standard
35170 If \SpecialChar LyX
35171 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35172 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35173 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35174 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35175 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35176 the \SpecialChar TeX
35178 If \SpecialChar LyX
35179 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35180 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35182 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35183 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35184 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35187 \begin_layout Subsection
35192 \begin_layout Standard
35193 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35194 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35197 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35199 \begin_inset space ~
35204 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35206 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35208 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35209 's main window, then only this selection
35210 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35211 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35212 the source view window.
35217 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35218 ; but note that if you have
35219 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35221 not just the one which is open at the time.
35224 \begin_layout Section
35225 Advanced Find and Replace
35226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35228 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35233 \begin_inset Index idx
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35243 \begin_inset Index idx
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35255 \begin_layout Subsection
35259 \begin_layout Standard
35260 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35261 allows for searching of complex,
35262 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35264 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35265 The key-features are:
35268 \begin_layout Itemize
35269 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35270 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35271 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35275 \begin_layout Itemize
35276 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35277 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35278 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35279 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35282 \begin_layout Itemize
35283 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35284 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35285 outside of mathematics environments
35288 \begin_layout Itemize
35289 Search may be widened to a specific
35294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35301 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35302 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35309 \begin_layout Itemize
35310 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35311 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35319 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35322 \begin_layout Subsection
35326 \begin_layout Standard
35327 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35329 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35342 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35345 ) or the toolbar button
35348 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35354 Advanced Find and Replace
35359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35363 \begin_layout Standard
35369 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35373 \begin_inset space ~
35378 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35381 arg "paragraph-break"
35385 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35386 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35390 arg "paragraph-break"
35393 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35397 searches backwards.
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35409 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35418 \begin_inset space ~
35423 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35427 Searching for mathematics
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35431 Mathematical formulas, such as
35432 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35435 or something more complex like
35436 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35439 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35444 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35445 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35446 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35447 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35453 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35457 \begin_layout Standard
35458 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35459 This is done by switching to the
35463 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35468 This way, entering in the
35475 \begin_layout Itemize
35476 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35477 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35480 \begin_layout Itemize
35481 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35482 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35485 \begin_layout Itemize
35486 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35487 of it only within section headings.
35488 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35489 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35493 \begin_layout Itemize
35494 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35495 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35498 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35502 \begin_layout Standard
35503 The entries made in the
35507 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35510 \begin_inset space ~
35516 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35520 button or alternatively press
35523 arg "paragraph-break"
35530 while the cursor is in the
35533 \begin_inset space ~
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35544 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35548 \begin_layout Itemize
35549 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35550 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35558 with its typewriter version
35559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35573 \begin_layout Itemize
35574 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35580 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35592 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35599 (you may want to enable the
35602 \begin_inset space ~
35610 \begin_inset space ~
35615 options and disable the
35623 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35631 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35632 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35636 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35639 , or occurrences of
35640 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35644 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35650 \begin_layout Subsection
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35655 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35660 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35664 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35674 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35680 This is done with the context menu
35682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35683 Insert Regular Expression
35685 while the cursor is in the
35690 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35691 expression matching rules
35695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35696 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35703 \begin_inset space ~
35706 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35707 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35713 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35714 same text in the document.
35715 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35716 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35719 \begin_layout Enumerate
35720 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35725 editor the fraction
35726 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35730 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35733 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35734 fractions with the given denominator.
35737 \begin_layout Enumerate
35738 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35750 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35755 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35756 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35757 Also, by inserting a
35758 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35761 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35762 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35765 \begin_layout Standard
35766 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35767 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35768 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35771 , and referring back to them through
35772 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35776 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35780 For example, try searching with the regexp
35781 \begin_inset Newline newline
35784 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35787 \begin_inset Newline newline
35790 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35793 \begin_layout Standard
35794 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35797 \begin_layout Standard
35798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35806 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35807 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35808 sub-expressions is absolute.
35810 \begin_inset space ~
35814 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35817 always refers to the first occurrence of
35818 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35821 in all entered regexps.
35829 \begin_layout Section
35831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35833 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35838 \begin_inset Index idx
35841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35850 \begin_layout Standard
35852 has a built-in spell checker.
35855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35862 key or the toolbar button
35865 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35868 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35869 beginning of the currently selected text.
35870 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35871 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35872 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35873 scrolled so that it is visible.
35874 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35875 n, if any could be found.
35876 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35880 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35881 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35884 \begin_layout Standard
35885 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35892 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35893 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35895 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35896 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35907 arg "dialog-show character"
35910 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35912 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35915 \begin_layout Standard
35916 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35917 can be downloaded from here:
35918 \begin_inset Newline newline
35922 \begin_inset Flex URL
35925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35927 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35933 \begin_inset Newline newline
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35940 files for each language.
35941 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35945 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35946 's installation subfolder
35954 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35956 \begin_inset Newline newline
35959 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35960 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35961 but in most cases these are
35977 is the language code.
35980 \begin_layout Subsection
35984 \begin_layout Standard
35987 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35988 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35990 \begin_inset space ~
35993 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35996 you can set the following things:
35999 \begin_layout Description
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36004 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36005 should use for spell checking.
36006 Depending on your platform,
36016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36017 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36018 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36033 \begin_inset space ~
36036 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36039 \begin_layout Description
36041 \begin_inset space ~
36044 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36045 will always use the given language
36046 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36049 \begin_layout Description
36051 \begin_inset space ~
36054 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36060 \begin_inset space \space{}
36064 This should normally not be needed.
36067 \begin_layout Description
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36076 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36088 \begin_layout Description
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36093 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36094 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36095 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36096 appear in a context menu.
36097 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36101 \begin_layout Description
36103 \begin_inset space ~
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36114 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36118 \begin_layout Section
36120 \begin_inset Index idx
36123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36132 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36139 \begin_layout Standard
36141 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36142 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36154 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36164 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36166 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36167 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36168 which are available for many languages.
36171 \begin_layout Standard
36172 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36173 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36177 \begin_layout Subsection
36178 Setting up the thesaurus
36181 \begin_layout Standard
36190 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36194 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36199 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36205 \begin_inset space ~
36213 For instance, the US English files are named:
36216 \begin_layout Itemize
36220 \begin_layout Itemize
36224 \begin_layout Standard
36233 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36234 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36237 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36238 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36239 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36241 \begin_inset space ~
36246 ) to the path where they are installed.
36250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36251 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36252 ies, typical locations are
36258 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36262 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36266 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36269 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36275 LibreOffice-<Version>
36282 On the Mac, the default location is
36284 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36285 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36286 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36287 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36288 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36289 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36297 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36298 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36299 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36303 \begin_layout Standard
36304 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36305 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36307 \begin_inset Newline newline
36311 \begin_inset Flex URL
36314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36316 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
36324 \begin_layout Standard
36325 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36326 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36328 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36329 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36330 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36332 \begin_inset space ~
36337 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36339 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36340 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36344 \begin_layout Standard
36345 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36347 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36350 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36356 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36359 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36360 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36368 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36369 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36370 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36372 \begin_inset space ~
36377 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36380 \begin_layout Subsection
36381 Using the thesaurus
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36385 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36387 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36390 or the toolbar button
36393 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36396 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36398 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36400 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36401 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36402 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36411 ), related terms (such as
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36423 ), compounds (such as
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36435 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36444 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36448 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36449 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36453 \begin_layout Standard
36454 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36455 the dictionary, such as the above
36459 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36464 \begin_inset space \space{}
36467 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36468 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36469 For example, looking up the word form
36473 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36478 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36483 \begin_inset space \space{}
36494 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36495 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36496 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36499 \begin_layout Section
36501 \begin_inset Index idx
36504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36511 \begin_inset Index idx
36514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36515 Document ! Change Tracking
36521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36523 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36530 \begin_layout Standard
36531 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36532 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36533 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36534 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36536 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36541 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36543 \begin_inset space ~
36551 \begin_layout Standard
36552 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36566 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36567 You can change the color in
36569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36570 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36572 \begin_inset space ~
36576 \begin_inset space ~
36581 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36587 \begin_inset Index idx
36590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 Color ! Change tracking
36596 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36597 's status bar when the
36598 cursor is in changed text.
36599 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36602 arg "changes-merge"
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36609 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36611 \begin_inset Index idx
36614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36623 \begin_layout Standard
36624 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36630 \begin_layout Standard
36631 \begin_inset Graphics
36632 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36640 \begin_layout Standard
36641 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36647 \begin_layout Standard
36648 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36651 \begin_layout Standard
36652 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36658 \begin_layout Standard
36659 \begin_inset Tabular
36660 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36661 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36662 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36663 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36673 arg "changes-track"
36681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36689 \begin_inset space ~
36692 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36694 \begin_inset space ~
36703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36712 arg "changes-output"
36720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36731 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36733 \begin_inset space ~
36737 \begin_inset space ~
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36771 Jumps to the next change
36777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36786 arg "change-accept"
36794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36802 \begin_inset space ~
36805 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36807 \begin_inset space ~
36816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36825 arg "change-reject"
36833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36841 \begin_inset space ~
36844 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36846 \begin_inset space ~
36855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36864 arg "changes-merge"
36872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36883 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36885 \begin_inset space ~
36894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36903 arg "all-changes-accept"
36911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36919 \begin_inset space ~
36922 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36924 \begin_inset space ~
36928 \begin_inset space ~
36937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36946 arg "all-changes-reject"
36954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36962 \begin_inset space ~
36965 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37004 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37038 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37040 \begin_inset space ~
37056 \begin_layout Standard
37057 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37063 \begin_layout Standard
37064 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37086 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37087 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37088 the next change after the current cursor position.
37089 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37090 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37091 step to the next change.
37092 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37095 \begin_layout Standard
37096 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37097 to describe a change.
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37101 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37107 \begin_inset Index idx
37110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37118 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37120 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37127 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37131 \begin_layout Section
37132 Comparison of Documents
37133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37135 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37140 \begin_inset Index idx
37143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37144 Comparison of documents
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37153 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37156 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37160 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37161 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37163 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37165 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37169 \begin_inset space ~
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37206 \begin_inset space ~
37211 enables the change tracking option
37214 \begin_inset space ~
37218 \begin_inset space ~
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37227 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37230 \begin_layout Section
37231 International Support
37232 \begin_inset Index idx
37235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37236 International support
37244 \begin_layout Standard
37245 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37246 with any language you want.
37247 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37248 up \SpecialChar LyX
37250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37252 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37260 \begin_layout Standard
37261 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37262 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37263 \begin_inset space ~
37267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37269 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37276 \begin_layout Subsection
37278 \begin_inset Index idx
37281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37288 \begin_inset Index idx
37291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37292 Document ! Settings
37298 \begin_inset Index idx
37301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37302 Document ! Language
37310 \begin_layout Standard
37313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37314 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37317 dialog lets you set
37319 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37329 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37334 \begin_inset space ~
37339 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37340 For details about the different encoding options see section
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37347 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37354 \begin_layout Subsection
37355 Keyboard mapping configuration
37356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37358 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37365 \begin_layout Standard
37366 If you have for example a U.
37367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37370 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37371 can use an alternate keymap.
37372 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37377 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37378 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37379 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37382 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37383 \begin_inset space ~
37387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37389 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37394 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37395 which one you want to use.
37398 \begin_layout Standard
37399 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37400 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37401 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37405 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37406 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37407 one to support the characters you want.
37408 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37415 \begin_layout Chapter
37418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37420 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37427 \begin_layout Standard
37428 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37429 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37430 topic inside the user's guide.
37433 \begin_layout Section
37435 \begin_inset Index idx
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37447 \begin_layout Standard
37452 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37455 \begin_layout Subsection
37459 \begin_layout Standard
37460 Creates a new document.
37463 \begin_layout Subsection
37467 \begin_layout Standard
37468 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37469 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37470 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37473 \begin_layout Subsection
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37481 \begin_layout Subsection
37485 \begin_layout Standard
37486 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37487 Click there on a file to open it.
37490 \begin_layout Subsection
37494 \begin_layout Standard
37495 Closes the current document.
37498 \begin_layout Subsection
37502 \begin_layout Standard
37503 Closes all opened documents.
37506 \begin_layout Subsection
37510 \begin_layout Standard
37511 Saves the actual document.
37514 \begin_layout Subsection
37518 \begin_layout Standard
37519 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37522 \begin_layout Subsection
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 Saves all opened documents.
37530 \begin_layout Subsection
37534 \begin_layout Standard
37535 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37538 \begin_layout Subsection
37542 \begin_layout Standard
37543 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37544 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37545 It is described in the section
37547 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37552 Additional Features
37557 \begin_layout Subsection
37561 \begin_layout Standard
37562 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37563 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37565 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37566 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37570 \begin_layout Standard
37571 When using the menu entry
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37579 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37596 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37597 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37600 \begin_layout Subsection
37602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37604 name "subsec:Export"
37611 \begin_layout Standard
37612 You can export your document to various file formats.
37613 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37615 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37616 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37617 during its configuration.
37620 \begin_layout Standard
37621 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37629 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37636 \begin_layout Description
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37645 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37650 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37651 \begin_inset Newline newline
37654 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37655 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37659 \begin_layout Description
37660 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37666 \begin_layout Description
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37671 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37677 \begin_layout Description
37678 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37679 's native DVI-format.
37680 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37681 files paths or file names in your document.
37683 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37690 \begin_layout Description
37691 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37692 in files paths or file names
37695 \begin_layout Description
37697 \begin_inset space ~
37704 ) DVI-format using the program
37706 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37709 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37721 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37729 \begin_layout Description
37731 \begin_inset space ~
37734 (cropped) the same as
37738 but with cropped page margins.
37741 \begin_layout Description
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37746 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37750 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37755 \begin_layout Description
37759 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37767 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37775 \begin_layout Description
37777 \begin_inset space ~
37781 \begin_inset space ~
37784 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37788 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37796 \begin_layout Description
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37809 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37810 source that is compilable with the program
37812 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37816 \begin_layout Description
37820 \begin_inset space ~
37825 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37826 source, additionally all images used in the document
37827 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37831 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37834 \begin_layout Description
37838 \begin_inset space ~
37843 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37844 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37845 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37853 \begin_layout Description
37857 \begin_inset space ~
37866 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37867 source that is compilable with the program
37873 \begin_layout Description
37875 \begin_inset space ~
37879 \begin_inset space ~
37886 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37887 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37893 \begin_layout Description
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37898 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37899 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37905 \begin_inset space \space{}
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37929 represent the version number)
37932 \begin_layout Description
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37941 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37942 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37943 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37947 \begin_layout Description
37948 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37949 's internal XHTML engine
37952 \begin_layout Description
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37962 \begin_inset space ~
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37969 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37974 For the conversion the program
37983 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37986 \begin_layout Description
37987 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37992 \begin_layout Description
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37997 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37999 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38002 For the conversion the program
38011 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38014 \begin_layout Description
38016 \begin_inset space ~
38019 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38020 For the conversion the program
38029 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38032 \begin_layout Description
38034 \begin_inset space ~
38037 (cropped) the same as
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38045 but with cropped page margins
38048 \begin_layout Description
38052 \begin_inset space ~
38057 PDF-format using the program
38061 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38064 \begin_layout Description
38068 \begin_inset space ~
38072 \begin_inset space ~
38080 \begin_inset space ~
38085 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38090 \begin_inset space \space{}
38093 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38097 \begin_layout Description
38101 \begin_inset space ~
38106 PDF-format using the program
38108 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38111 , produces PDF-files directly
38114 \begin_layout Description
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38123 PDF-format using the program
38127 , produces PDF-files directly
38130 \begin_layout Description
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38139 PDF-format using the program
38143 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38146 \begin_layout Description
38150 \begin_inset space ~
38155 PDF-format using the program
38160 , produces PDF-files directly
38163 \begin_layout Description
38167 \begin_inset space ~
38175 \begin_layout Description
38179 \begin_inset space ~
38183 \begin_inset space ~
38188 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38189 and then exported as text using the program
38194 \begin_layout Description
38199 PostScript format using the program
38207 options see section
38208 \begin_inset space ~
38212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38214 reference "subsec:General-output"
38221 \begin_layout Description
38222 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38223 source and also code in the statistical programming
38237 it is possible to use
38241 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38245 \begin_layout Standard
38246 If one of the menu entries
38253 \begin_inset space ~
38262 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38264 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38266 \begin_inset space ~
38270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38272 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38277 \begin_inset Index idx
38280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38281 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38290 \begin_layout Subsection
38294 \begin_layout Standard
38295 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38296 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38299 \begin_inset space ~
38303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38305 reference "sec:Paths"
38310 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38319 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38320 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38321 's preferences as described in section
38322 \begin_inset space ~
38326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38328 reference "subsec:Converters"
38335 \begin_layout Subsection
38336 New and Close Window
38339 \begin_layout Standard
38340 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38344 \begin_layout Subsection
38348 \begin_layout Standard
38349 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38352 \begin_layout Section
38354 \begin_inset Index idx
38357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38366 \begin_layout Subsection
38370 \begin_layout Standard
38371 Described in section
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38378 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38385 \begin_layout Subsection
38386 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38389 \begin_layout Standard
38390 Described in section
38391 \begin_inset space ~
38395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38397 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38404 \begin_layout Subsection
38408 \begin_layout Standard
38409 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38410 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38413 \begin_layout Subsection
38417 \begin_layout Standard
38418 Selects the whole document.
38421 \begin_layout Subsection
38422 Find & Replace (Quick)
38425 \begin_layout Standard
38426 Described in section
38427 \begin_inset space ~
38431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38433 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38440 \begin_layout Subsection
38441 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38444 \begin_layout Standard
38445 Described in section
38446 \begin_inset space ~
38450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38452 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38459 \begin_layout Subsection
38460 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38463 \begin_layout Standard
38464 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38468 \begin_layout Subsection
38472 \begin_layout Standard
38473 Described in section
38474 \begin_inset space ~
38478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38480 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38487 \begin_layout Subsection
38489 \begin_inset Index idx
38492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38493 Paragraph ! Settings
38501 \begin_layout Standard
38502 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38503 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38507 \begin_layout Standard
38508 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38509 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38515 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38516 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38526 \begin_layout Subsection
38527 Table and Rows & Columns
38530 \begin_layout Standard
38531 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38532 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38533 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38536 \begin_layout Subsection
38540 \begin_layout Standard
38541 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38542 It will dissolve this inset.
38543 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38547 \begin_layout Subsection
38551 \begin_layout Standard
38552 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38553 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38556 \begin_layout Subsection
38557 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38560 \begin_layout Standard
38561 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38563 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38564 \begin_inset space ~
38568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38570 reference "sec:Nesting"
38575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38577 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38584 \begin_layout Subsection
38586 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652312
38589 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38592 \begin_layout Standard
38594 \change_deleted -712698321 1514652312
38595 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38596 nts of the same type.
38598 \begin_inset space ~
38602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38604 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38608 for an explanation.
38613 \begin_layout Section
38615 \begin_inset Index idx
38618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38628 At the bottom of the
38632 menu the opened documents are listed.
38635 \begin_layout Subsection
38636 Open/Close all Insets
38639 \begin_layout Standard
38640 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38643 \begin_layout Subsection
38644 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38647 \begin_layout Standard
38648 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38651 \begin_layout Standard
38652 Math macros are described in the
38659 \begin_layout Subsection
38663 \begin_layout Standard
38664 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38665 \begin_inset space ~
38669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38671 reference "sec:Navigating"
38676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38678 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38685 \begin_layout Subsection
38689 \begin_layout Standard
38690 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38692 \begin_inset space ~
38696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38698 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38705 \begin_layout Subsection
38709 \begin_layout Standard
38710 Opens a window showing console messages.
38711 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38716 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38717 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38718 is processing the document.
38721 \begin_layout Subsection
38723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38725 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38730 \begin_inset Index idx
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38742 \begin_layout Standard
38743 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38745 All toolbars and the
38748 \begin_inset space ~
38753 can be turned on and off.
38758 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38770 \begin_inset space ~
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38787 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38791 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38798 \begin_layout Standard
38803 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38807 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38808 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38809 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38810 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38811 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38814 \begin_layout Standard
38816 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38823 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38830 \begin_layout Subsection
38834 \begin_layout Standard
38838 \begin_inset space ~
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38850 \begin_inset space ~
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38858 \begin_inset space ~
38863 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38864 's main window vertically while
38867 \begin_inset space ~
38871 \begin_inset space ~
38875 \begin_inset space ~
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38892 will split it horizontally.
38893 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38894 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38895 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38896 three or more documents at the same time.
38897 To close a split view, use the menu
38900 \begin_inset space ~
38904 \begin_inset space ~
38912 \begin_layout Subsection
38916 \begin_layout Standard
38917 Closes a split view.
38920 \begin_layout Subsection
38924 \begin_layout Standard
38925 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38926 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38927 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38928 's main window fullscreen.
38929 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38930 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38933 \begin_layout Section
38935 \begin_inset Index idx
38938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38947 \begin_layout Subsection
38951 \begin_layout Standard
38952 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38959 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38970 \begin_layout Subsection
38972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38974 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38981 \begin_layout Standard
38982 Here you can insert the following characters:
38985 \begin_layout Description
38990 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38993 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38994 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38995 -packages you have installed.
38996 You can get a complete display by checking
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39005 \begin_inset Newline newline
39009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39017 Not all characters will be visible in the
39021 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39022 dialog (see section
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39029 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39033 ) can display every character.
39041 \begin_layout Description
39042 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39046 \begin_layout Description
39048 \begin_inset space ~
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39055 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39062 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39069 \begin_layout Description
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39074 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39078 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39084 \begin_layout Description
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39089 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39093 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39099 \begin_layout Description
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39104 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39108 \begin_layout Description
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39113 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39117 \begin_layout Description
39119 \begin_inset space ~
39122 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39128 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39134 \begin_layout Description
39136 \begin_inset space ~
39139 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39143 \begin_layout Description
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39149 \begin_inset Index idx
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39159 \begin_inset Index idx
39162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39168 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39169 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39171 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39177 \begin_inset Index idx
39180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 \begin_inset Newline newline
39191 More information about this feature can be found in the
39197 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39203 \begin_layout Description
39204 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39206 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39207 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39211 \begin_layout Subsection
39215 \begin_layout Standard
39216 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39219 \begin_layout Description
39220 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39221 \begin_inset script superscript
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39232 \begin_layout Description
39233 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
39234 \begin_inset script subscript
39236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39245 \begin_layout Description
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39250 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39257 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
39264 \begin_layout Description
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39269 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
39270 \begin_inset space ~
39274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39276 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
39283 \begin_layout Description
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39288 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39295 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
39302 \begin_layout Description
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39307 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
39309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39313 \begin_inset space \space{}
39316 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
39317 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
39323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39326 To insert a fraction use the command
39331 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39335 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39344 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39351 \begin_layout Description
39353 \begin_inset space ~
39356 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39357 \begin_inset space ~
39361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39363 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39370 \begin_layout Description
39372 \begin_inset space ~
39375 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39376 \begin_inset space ~
39380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39382 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39389 \begin_layout Description
39391 \begin_inset space ~
39394 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39395 \begin_inset space ~
39399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39401 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39408 \begin_layout Description
39409 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39410 \begin_inset space ~
39414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39416 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39423 \begin_layout Description
39425 \begin_inset space ~
39428 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39429 \begin_inset space ~
39433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39435 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39442 \begin_layout Description
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39447 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39448 \begin_inset space ~
39452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39454 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39461 \begin_layout Description
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39470 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
39473 \begin_inset space ~
39477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39479 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
39486 for a usage example.
39489 \begin_layout Description
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39495 \begin_inset space ~
39498 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39499 \begin_inset space ~
39503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39505 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39512 \begin_layout Description
39514 \begin_inset space ~
39517 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39518 as described in section
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39525 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39532 \begin_layout Description
39534 \begin_inset space ~
39537 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39544 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39551 \begin_layout Description
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39556 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39557 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39565 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39572 \begin_layout Description
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39577 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39584 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39591 \begin_layout Description
39593 \begin_inset space ~
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39600 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39607 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39614 \begin_layout Subsection
39618 \begin_layout Standard
39619 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39644 are described in section
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39651 reference "sec:toc"
39660 is described in section
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39667 reference "sec:Index"
39675 is described in section
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39682 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39688 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39691 is described in section
39692 \begin_inset space ~
39696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39698 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39705 \begin_layout Subsection
39709 \begin_layout Standard
39710 To insert floats, as described in section
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39717 reference "sec:Floats"
39721 and in detail the chapter
39728 \begin_inset space ~
39736 \begin_layout Subsection
39740 \begin_layout Standard
39741 To insert notes, described in section
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39748 reference "sec:Notes"
39755 \begin_layout Subsection
39759 \begin_layout Standard
39760 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39762 Branches are described in section
39763 \begin_inset space ~
39767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39769 reference "sec:Branches"
39776 \begin_layout Subsection
39780 \begin_layout Standard
39781 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39782 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39784 An example is the document class
39785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39792 with three custom insets.
39795 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39799 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39805 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39808 \begin_layout Subsection
39810 \begin_inset Index idx
39813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39822 \begin_layout Standard
39823 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39825 For more information see chapter
39827 External Document Parts
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39836 \begin_layout Subsection
39838 \begin_inset Index idx
39841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39850 \begin_layout Standard
39851 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39852 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39859 \begin_inset space ~
39867 \begin_layout Subsection
39871 \begin_layout Standard
39876 dialog as described in section
39877 \begin_inset space ~
39881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39883 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39890 \begin_layout Subsection
39894 \begin_layout Standard
39899 as described in section
39900 \begin_inset space ~
39904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39906 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39913 \begin_layout Subsection
39917 \begin_layout Standard
39922 as described in section
39923 \begin_inset space ~
39927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39929 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39936 \begin_layout Subsection
39938 \begin_inset Index idx
39941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39948 \begin_inset Index idx
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39952 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39960 \begin_layout Standard
39961 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39962 Floats are described in section
39963 \begin_inset space ~
39967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39969 reference "sec:Floats"
39973 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39975 Multi-page Captions
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39988 \begin_layout Subsection
39992 \begin_layout Standard
39993 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39994 \begin_inset space ~
39998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40000 reference "sec:Index"
40007 \begin_layout Subsection
40011 \begin_layout Standard
40012 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40013 \begin_inset space ~
40017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40019 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40026 \begin_layout Subsection
40030 \begin_layout Standard
40031 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40032 Tables are described in section
40033 \begin_inset space ~
40037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40039 reference "sec:Tables"
40043 and in detail in the chapter
40050 \begin_inset space ~
40058 \begin_layout Subsection
40062 \begin_layout Standard
40068 Graphics are described in section
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40075 reference "sec:Graphics"
40082 \begin_layout Subsection
40086 \begin_layout Standard
40087 Inserts a URL as described in section
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40094 reference "subsec:URLs"
40101 \begin_layout Subsection
40105 \begin_layout Standard
40106 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40113 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
40120 \begin_layout Subsection
40124 \begin_layout Standard
40125 Inserts a footnote as described in section
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40132 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40139 \begin_layout Subsection
40143 \begin_layout Standard
40144 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40151 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40156 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652349
40160 \begin_layout Subsection
40162 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652384
40165 Separate <Name> Environment (Above/Below)
40168 \begin_layout Standard
40170 \change_inserted -712698321 1514652391
40171 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
40172 environments of the same type.
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40180 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
40184 for an explanation.
40189 \begin_layout Subsection
40193 \begin_layout Standard
40194 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40195 title or caption of a float.
40196 Inserts a short title as described in section
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40203 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40210 \begin_layout Subsection
40215 \begin_layout Standard
40216 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40217 Code box as described in section
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40224 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40231 \begin_layout Subsection
40233 \begin_inset Index idx
40236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40245 \begin_layout Standard
40246 Inserts a program listings box.
40247 Program listings are explained in the chapter
40249 Program Code Listings
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40262 \begin_layout Subsection
40266 \begin_layout Standard
40267 Inserts the actual date.
40268 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
40273 \begin_layout Subsection
40277 \begin_layout Standard
40278 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
40279 \begin_inset space ~
40283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40285 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40292 \begin_layout Section
40294 \begin_inset Index idx
40297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
40308 \begin_inset space ~
40311 of the current document.
40312 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
40315 \begin_layout Subsection
40319 \begin_layout Standard
40320 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
40321 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
40322 to jump, for example, between section
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40327 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40331 2.5 and use the submenu
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40361 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
40365 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
40371 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
40374 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40377 \begin_layout Standard
40378 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40387 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40390 \begin_inset space ~
40395 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40398 \begin_layout Subsection
40399 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40402 \begin_layout Standard
40403 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40407 \begin_layout Subsection
40411 \begin_layout Standard
40412 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40413 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40414 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40418 \begin_inset space ~
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40430 \begin_layout Subsection
40434 \begin_layout Standard
40435 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40438 The \SpecialChar LyX
40439 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40454 manual for a detailed description.
40457 \begin_layout Section
40459 \begin_inset Index idx
40462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40471 \begin_layout Subsection
40475 \begin_layout Standard
40476 Change Tracking is described in section
40477 \begin_inset space ~
40481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40483 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40490 \begin_layout Subsection
40498 \begin_layout Standard
40499 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40500 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40501 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40503 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40504 to the clipboard or update the view.
40505 \begin_inset Newline newline
40508 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40512 \begin_layout Standard
40515 Open Containing Directory
40517 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40518 's temporary folder for the document.
40519 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40520 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40521 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40522 For example some journals require to send the
40526 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40530 \begin_layout Subsection
40531 Start Appendix Here
40534 \begin_layout Standard
40535 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40536 as described in section
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40543 reference "sec:Appendices"
40550 \begin_layout Subsection
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40560 default output format for the document (menu
40562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40563 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40564 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40586 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40589 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40590 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40592 \begin_inset space ~
40595 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40600 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40606 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40618 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40622 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40623 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40625 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40626 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40631 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40633 \begin_inset space ~
40636 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40640 \begin_inset space ~
40644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40646 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40651 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40652 when it is first configured.
40653 The default output format is
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40664 \begin_layout Subsection
40665 View (Other Formats)
40668 \begin_layout Standard
40669 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40670 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40671 actual document with an external program.
40672 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40673 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40674 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40676 All possible formats are listed in section
40677 \begin_inset space ~
40681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40683 reference "subsec:Export"
40688 You should at least see the menu entry
40693 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40695 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40697 \begin_inset space ~
40701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40703 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40708 \begin_inset Index idx
40711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40712 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40721 \begin_layout Standard
40722 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40723 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40725 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40726 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40731 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40736 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40746 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40751 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40752 when it is first configured.
40755 \begin_layout Subsection
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40763 \begin_layout Standard
40764 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40765 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40768 \begin_layout Subsection
40769 Update (Other Formats)
40772 \begin_layout Standard
40773 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40774 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40777 \begin_layout Subsection
40778 View Master Document
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40782 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40798 \begin_inset space ~
40803 manual for more information on this topic).
40804 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40805 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40809 \begin_inset space ~
40813 \begin_inset space ~
40818 generates the output of the whole book, while
40822 will just output the chapter alone.
40825 \begin_layout Standard
40826 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40827 in the document settings (menu
40829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40830 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40831 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40849 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40853 ) or in the preferences (menu
40855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40856 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40858 \begin_inset space ~
40861 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40866 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40868 \begin_inset space ~
40872 \begin_inset space ~
40878 \begin_inset space ~
40882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40884 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40891 \begin_layout Subsection
40892 Update Master Document
40895 \begin_layout Standard
40896 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40917 manual for more information on this topic).
40918 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40919 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40922 \begin_layout Standard
40923 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40924 in the document settings (menu
40926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40927 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40928 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40934 \begin_inset space ~
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40946 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40950 ) or in the preferences (menu
40952 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40953 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40958 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40963 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40981 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40988 \begin_layout Subsection
40990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40992 name "subsec:Compressed"
40999 \begin_layout Standard
41000 Un/compresses the current document.
41001 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41002 compression (see the
41004 Additional Features
41006 manual for details).
41009 \begin_layout Subsection
41013 \begin_layout Standard
41014 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41017 \begin_layout Subsection
41021 \begin_layout Standard
41022 The document settings are described in appendix
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41029 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41036 \begin_layout Section
41038 \begin_inset Index idx
41041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41050 \begin_layout Subsection
41054 \begin_layout Standard
41055 Spell checking is explained in section
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41062 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
41069 \begin_layout Subsection
41073 \begin_layout Standard
41074 The thesaurus is described in section
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41081 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
41088 \begin_layout Subsection
41090 \begin_inset Index idx
41093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41100 \begin_inset Index idx
41103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41112 \begin_layout Standard
41113 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
41114 the highlighted document part.
41117 \begin_layout Subsection
41123 \begin_inset Index idx
41126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41127 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41136 \begin_layout Standard
41137 Generates with the help of the program
41139 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41142 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
41143 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
41144 This feature is not available on Windows.
41147 \begin_layout Subsection
41153 \begin_inset Index idx
41156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41166 \begin_layout Standard
41167 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41177 to see the full filename paths.
41180 \begin_layout Subsection
41182 \begin_inset Index idx
41185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41194 \begin_layout Standard
41195 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41196 files as described in section
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41203 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41210 \begin_layout Subsection
41212 \begin_inset Index idx
41215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41228 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41246 \begin_inset Index idx
41249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41250 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41259 \begin_layout Standard
41260 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
41261 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
41262 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41263 -packages and programs it needs; see
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41271 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41278 \begin_layout Subsection
41282 \begin_layout Standard
41287 dialog as described in detail in appendix
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41294 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41301 \begin_layout Section
41303 \begin_inset Index idx
41306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 \begin_layout Standard
41316 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
41317 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
41319 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
41323 \begin_layout Standard
41327 \begin_inset space ~
41332 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
41333 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41334 packages and classes found
41335 by \SpecialChar LyX
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41343 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
41350 \begin_layout Standard
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41359 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
41364 \begin_layout Section
41366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41368 name "sec:Toolbars"
41375 \begin_layout Standard
41376 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41383 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41390 \begin_layout Standard
41391 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41392 This is described in the
41394 Additional Features
41399 \begin_layout Subsection
41401 \begin_inset Index idx
41404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 \begin_layout Standard
41414 \begin_inset Graphics
41415 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41424 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41430 \begin_layout Standard
41431 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41448 \begin_inset Note Note
41451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41452 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41457 manual for more information.
41465 \begin_layout Standard
41466 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41472 \begin_layout Standard
41473 \begin_inset Tabular
41474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41475 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41476 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 \begin_inset Graphics
41484 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41498 pull-down box for the environments
41511 \begin_layout Standard
41512 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41518 \begin_layout Standard
41520 \begin_inset Tabular
41521 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41522 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41523 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41524 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41548 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41578 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41608 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41624 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41638 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41645 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41654 arg "spelling-continuously"
41662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41666 Spellcheck continuously
41672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41695 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41725 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41732 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41755 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41785 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41815 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41831 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41845 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41913 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41927 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41928 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41956 Emphasize text, function of the
41958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41960 \begin_inset space ~
41963 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41993 Set text to noun style, function of the
41995 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41997 \begin_inset space ~
42000 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 arg "textstyle-apply"
42026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42030 Format text using the current settings in the
42032 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42037 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42070 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42072 \begin_inset space ~
42081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42090 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
42098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42118 arg "tabular-insert"
42126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42132 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42148 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42160 Toggle outline window on/off,
42162 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42169 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42178 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42190 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
42213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42217 Toggle table toolbar on/off
42230 \begin_layout Subsection
42232 \begin_inset Index idx
42235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42244 \begin_layout Standard
42245 \begin_inset Graphics
42246 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
42254 \begin_layout Standard
42255 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42261 \begin_layout Standard
42262 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42266 \begin_layout Standard
42267 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42273 \begin_layout Standard
42274 \begin_inset Tabular
42275 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
42276 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42277 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42278 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42306 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42315 arg "layout Enumerate"
42323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 arg "layout Itemize"
42350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42396 arg "layout Description"
42404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42414 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42423 arg "depth-increment"
42431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42439 \begin_inset space ~
42443 \begin_inset space ~
42452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42461 arg "depth-decrement"
42469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42475 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42477 \begin_inset space ~
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42499 arg "float-insert figure"
42507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42514 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42530 arg "float-insert table"
42538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42545 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42591 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42621 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42667 \begin_inset space ~
42676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42685 arg "nomencl-insert"
42693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42701 \begin_inset space ~
42710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42719 arg "footnote-insert"
42727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42749 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42763 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42797 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42798 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42800 \begin_inset space ~
42809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42818 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42894 \begin_inset space ~
42903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42912 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42927 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42943 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42958 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42960 \begin_inset space ~
42969 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42978 arg "dialog-show character"
42986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42992 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42994 \begin_inset space ~
42997 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43013 arg "layout-paragraph"
43021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43027 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43029 \begin_inset space ~
43038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43047 arg "thesaurus-entry"
43055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43061 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43075 \begin_layout Subsection
43076 View/Update Toolbar
43077 \begin_inset Index idx
43080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43081 Toolbar ! View / Update
43089 \begin_layout Standard
43090 \begin_inset Graphics
43091 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
43098 \begin_layout Standard
43099 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43105 \begin_layout Standard
43106 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43110 \begin_layout Standard
43111 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43117 \begin_layout Standard
43118 \begin_inset Tabular
43119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
43120 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43121 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43122 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43162 arg "buffer-update"
43170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43176 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43183 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43192 arg "master-buffer-view"
43200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43206 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 arg "master-buffer-update"
43234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43240 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43242 \begin_inset space ~
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43264 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
43272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43278 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43279 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43280 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43281 Synchronize with Output
43287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43311 View (Other Formats)
43317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43324 arg "update-others"
43332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43339 Update (Other Formats)
43352 \begin_layout Standard
43353 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
43357 \begin_layout Subsection
43361 \begin_layout Standard
43362 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
43363 \begin_inset space ~
43367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43369 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43373 , the table toolbar
43374 \begin_inset Index idx
43377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43391 manual and the math macro toolbar
43392 \begin_inset Index idx
43395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43408 \begin_layout Chapter
43409 The Document Settings
43410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43412 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43417 \begin_inset Index idx
43420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43421 Document ! Settings
43429 \begin_layout Standard
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43438 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43439 is called with the menu
43441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43445 You can save your document settings as default with the
43447 Save as Document Defaults
43449 button in any dialog.
43450 This will create a template named
43454 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43455 when you create a new document without
43459 \begin_layout Standard
43464 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43465 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43468 \begin_layout Standard
43469 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43470 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43471 to find the one you are looking for.
43472 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43473 the submenus of the dialog.
43475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43479 \begin_inset space \space{}
43483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43490 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43491 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43492 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43495 \begin_layout Section
43499 \begin_layout Standard
43500 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43502 Document classes are described in section
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43509 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43517 \begin_layout Standard
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43526 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43531 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43532 as a layout for a document class.
43533 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43535 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43544 \begin_layout Standard
43545 Some classes use special class options by default.
43546 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43550 and you can decide to use them or not.
43551 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43552 recommended you leave them untouched.
43557 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43558 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43563 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43565 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43571 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43572 \begin_inset Newline newline
43577 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43580 \begin_inset Newline newline
43583 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43584 distribution, see section
43589 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43591 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43609 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43610 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43611 in the background if the child document
43612 is opened without its master.
43613 This way child documents are always compilable.
43614 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43629 \begin_layout Standard
43630 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43641 \begin_inset Index idx
43644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43646 packages ! prettyref
43652 \begin_inset Index idx
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43657 packages ! refstyle
43662 for cross-references, see section
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43669 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43676 \begin_layout Section
43680 \begin_layout Standard
43681 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43682 Please refer to the section
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43693 \begin_inset space ~
43698 manual for details.
43701 \begin_layout Section
43705 \begin_layout Standard
43706 Modules are explained in section
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43713 reference "subsec:Modules"
43720 \begin_layout Section
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43732 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43739 \begin_layout Section
43743 \begin_layout Standard
43744 The document font settings are described in section
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43751 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43758 \begin_layout Section
43762 \begin_layout Standard
43763 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43780 and whether it should be a
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43788 can also be specified here.
43791 \begin_layout Standard
43792 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43793 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43794 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43796 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43799 \begin_layout Standard
43802 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43805 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43806 justifies the text on screen.
43807 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43811 \begin_layout Section
43815 \begin_layout Standard
43816 This dialog is described in sections
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43823 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43830 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43837 \begin_layout Section
43841 \begin_layout Standard
43842 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43849 reference "subsec:Margins"
43856 \begin_layout Section
43858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43860 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43865 \begin_inset Index idx
43868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43869 Language ! Encoding
43877 \begin_layout Standard
43878 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43879 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43880 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43882 is always encoded in utf8).
43883 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43884 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43885 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43886 -command is not known for
43887 a particular character).
43890 \begin_layout Standard
43891 If you use the option
43896 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43897 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43898 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43900 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43901 exactly one encoding.
43902 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43905 \begin_layout Standard
43907 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43908 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43909 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43910 installation supports Unicode), choose
43911 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43912 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43913 is quite incomplete, so
43914 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43919 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43920 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43921 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43922 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43923 -commands is not used, because all
43924 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43925 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43926 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43927 , two new alternative engines
43928 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43930 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43932 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43963 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43968 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43972 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43975 \begin_layout Standard
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43984 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43985 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43995 The possible settings are:
43998 \begin_layout Description
43999 Default uses the language package that is selected in
44001 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44002 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44012 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44019 \begin_layout Description
44020 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
44021 format you will use.
44022 In many cases this will be
44027 \begin_inset Index idx
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44038 If the newer package
44043 \begin_inset Index idx
44046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44048 packages ! polyglossia
44053 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44054 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44055 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
44057 this package will be used instead of
44064 \begin_layout Description
44066 \begin_inset space ~
44077 would be more appropriate.
44080 \begin_layout Description
44081 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
44082 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
44086 (for German texts), type in
44089 \begin_inset Newline newline
44094 usepackage{ngerman}
44097 \begin_layout Description
44098 None will not use a language package.
44099 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
44102 \begin_layout Standard
44103 Here is a list with the important encodings:
44106 \begin_layout Description
44108 \begin_inset space ~
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44116 \begin_inset space ~
44123 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44129 \begin_inset Index idx
44132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44134 packages ! inputenc
44140 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
44141 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
44142 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
44146 \begin_layout Description
44147 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
44149 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
44150 commands, which may result in a big
44151 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44152 -commands are needed.
44155 \begin_layout Description
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44164 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
44167 \begin_layout Description
44169 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44176 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
44179 \begin_layout Description
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44184 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
44187 \begin_layout Description
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44196 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44197 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44200 \begin_layout Description
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44206 \begin_inset space ~
44209 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
44213 \begin_layout Description
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44222 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
44223 ISO-8859-13 encoding
44226 \begin_layout Description
44228 \begin_inset space ~
44232 \begin_inset space ~
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44239 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44246 \begin_layout Description
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44256 \begin_inset space ~
44259 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
44260 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
44263 \begin_layout Description
44265 \begin_inset space ~
44269 \begin_inset space ~
44272 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
44273 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
44274 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44275 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44280 \begin_inset space ~
44286 \begin_layout Description
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44295 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
44296 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
44297 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44299 should try to use the encoding Unicode
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44310 \begin_layout Description
44312 \begin_inset space ~
44316 \begin_inset space ~
44319 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
44322 \begin_layout Description
44324 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44331 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
44334 \begin_layout Description
44336 \begin_inset space ~
44340 \begin_inset space ~
44343 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
44346 \begin_layout Description
44348 \begin_inset space ~
44351 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
44354 \begin_layout Description
44356 \begin_inset space ~
44359 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
44362 \begin_layout Description
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_inset space ~
44371 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
44374 \begin_layout Description
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44386 \begin_layout Description
44388 \begin_inset space ~
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44395 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44398 \begin_layout Description
44400 \begin_inset space ~
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44410 \begin_layout Description
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44416 \begin_inset space ~
44419 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44425 \begin_inset Index idx
44428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44435 , when using this, set the document language to
44440 \begin_layout Description
44442 \begin_inset space ~
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44449 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44454 , when using this, set the document language to
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44463 \begin_layout Description
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44472 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44478 \begin_inset Index idx
44481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44483 packages ! japanese
44488 , when using this, set the document language to
44493 \begin_layout Description
44495 \begin_inset space ~
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44502 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44507 , when using this, set the document language to
44512 \begin_layout Description
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44521 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44526 , when using this, set the document language to
44531 \begin_layout Description
44533 \begin_inset space ~
44536 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44539 \begin_layout Description
44541 \begin_inset space ~
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44552 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44555 \begin_layout Description
44557 \begin_inset space ~
44561 \begin_inset space ~
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44568 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44569 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44570 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44573 \begin_layout Description
44575 \begin_inset space ~
44579 \begin_inset space ~
44585 \begin_layout Description
44587 \begin_inset space ~
44591 \begin_inset space ~
44594 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44595 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44598 \begin_layout Description
44600 \begin_inset space ~
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44607 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44613 \begin_inset Index idx
44616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44623 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44626 \begin_layout Description
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44639 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44646 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44649 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44656 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44657 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44659 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44662 \begin_layout Description
44664 \begin_inset space ~
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44671 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44677 \begin_inset Index idx
44680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44687 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44690 \begin_layout Description
44692 \begin_inset space ~
44695 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44701 \begin_inset Index idx
44704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 packages ! inputenc
44712 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44716 \begin_layout Description
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44726 \begin_inset space ~
44729 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44736 \begin_layout Description
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44749 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44750 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44751 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44755 \begin_layout Description
44757 \begin_inset space ~
44761 \begin_inset space ~
44765 \begin_inset space ~
44768 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44769 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44772 \begin_layout Section
44774 \begin_inset Index idx
44777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 \begin_inset Index idx
44787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44794 \begin_inset Index idx
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44798 Color ! Shaded boxes
44804 \begin_inset Index idx
44807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44808 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44816 \begin_layout Standard
44817 Here you can alter the font color for the
44821 (default: black), for
44824 \begin_inset space ~
44829 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44833 (default: white) and for
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44846 sets the color back to the default.
44849 \begin_layout Standard
44850 Clicking any button showing
44858 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44859 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44860 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44861 later more quickly.
44864 \begin_layout Standard
44865 Note, if you change the
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44873 font color and use the option
44876 \begin_inset space ~
44881 in the document settings under
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44889 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44896 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44903 \begin_layout Standard
44904 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44910 \begin_layout Standard
44914 \begin_inset space ~
44923 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44926 \begin_inset space ~
44929 Code after a forced page break:
44932 \begin_layout Itemize
44933 For the page color:
44934 \begin_inset Newline newline
44941 pagecolor{color name}
44944 \begin_layout Itemize
44945 For the text color:
44946 \begin_inset Newline newline
44956 \begin_layout Standard
44957 You are restricted to one of
44993 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45006 \begin_inset Newline newline
45009 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
45010 names to refer to them:
45013 \begin_layout Itemize
45019 \begin_inset Newline newline
45024 page_backgroundcolor
45027 \begin_layout Itemize
45031 \begin_inset space ~
45037 \begin_inset Newline newline
45045 \begin_layout Itemize
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45055 \begin_inset Newline newline
45063 \begin_layout Itemize
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45073 \begin_inset Newline newline
45081 \begin_layout Standard
45082 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45093 \begin_inset space ~
45101 \begin_layout Section
45105 \begin_layout Standard
45106 Here you can adjust the
45110 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
45114 as described in section
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45121 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45128 \begin_layout Section
45132 \begin_layout Standard
45133 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45139 \begin_inset Index idx
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45144 packages ! biblatex
45154 \begin_inset Index idx
45157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 \begin_inset Index idx
45172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45183 Sectioned bibliography
45185 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45191 \begin_inset Index idx
45194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45196 packages ! bibtopic
45206 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
45207 Finally, you can select a document-specific
45211 for the generation of the bibliography.
45212 For a further description of these possibilities see section
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45219 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45226 \begin_layout Section
45230 \begin_layout Standard
45231 Here you can define the
45235 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
45237 \begin_inset space ~
45241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45243 reference "sec:Index"
45250 \begin_layout Section
45254 \begin_layout Standard
45255 The PDF properties are explained in section
45256 \begin_inset space ~
45260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45262 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45269 \begin_layout Section
45273 \begin_layout Standard
45274 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
45275 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45281 \begin_inset Index idx
45284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45296 \begin_inset Index idx
45299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45311 \begin_inset Index idx
45314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45326 \begin_inset Index idx
45329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45341 \begin_inset Index idx
45344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45346 packages ! mathdots
45356 \begin_inset Index idx
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45361 packages ! mathtools
45371 \begin_inset Index idx
45374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45386 \begin_inset Index idx
45389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45391 packages ! stackrel
45401 \begin_inset Index idx
45404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45406 packages ! stmaryrd
45416 \begin_inset Index idx
45419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45421 packages ! undertilde
45426 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45429 \begin_layout Description
45430 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45431 -errors in formulas,
45432 ensure that you have this enabled.
45435 \begin_layout Description
45436 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45437 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45438 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45442 \begin_layout Description
45443 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45446 \begin_inset space ~
45458 \begin_layout Description
45459 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45462 \begin_inset space ~
45474 \begin_layout Description
45475 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45486 \begin_layout Description
45487 mathtools is used for the math commands
45523 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45530 \begin_layout Description
45531 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45533 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45542 \begin_layout Description
45543 stackrel is used for the math command
45560 \begin_layout Description
45561 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45564 \begin_layout Description
45565 undertilde is used for the math command
45573 Accents for one Character
45582 \begin_layout Section
45586 \begin_layout Standard
45587 The float placement options are described in the section
45590 \begin_inset space ~
45598 \begin_inset space ~
45606 \begin_layout Section
45610 \begin_layout Standard
45611 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45613 Program Code Listings
45618 \begin_inset space ~
45626 \begin_layout Section
45630 \begin_layout Standard
45631 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45639 set to be used and set the
45644 The itemize environment is described in section
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45651 reference "sec:Itemize"
45658 \begin_layout Standard
45659 You can furthermore specify a
45662 \begin_inset space ~
45667 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45668 command of the desired character.
45669 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45676 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45682 \begin_inset space \space{}
45686 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45696 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45697 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45700 \begin_layout Standard
45701 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45709 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45710 -packages in the preamble (menu
45713 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45714 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45717 \begin_inset space ~
45723 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45727 usepackage{textcomp}
45730 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45734 usepackage{amssymb}
45744 \begin_layout Section
45748 \begin_layout Standard
45749 Branches are described in section
45750 \begin_inset space ~
45754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45756 reference "sec:Branches"
45763 \begin_layout Section
45765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45767 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45774 \begin_layout Standard
45775 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45778 \begin_layout Description
45780 \begin_inset space ~
45784 \begin_inset space ~
45787 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45807 View Master Document
45808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45815 Update Master Document
45816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45823 menu or the toolbar.
45824 The default is set in
45826 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45827 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45829 \begin_inset space ~
45832 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45836 \begin_inset space ~
45840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45842 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45849 \begin_layout Description
45851 \begin_inset space ~
45855 \begin_inset space ~
45858 Output settings for the menu
45860 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45862 \begin_inset space ~
45868 For a detailed description see section
45870 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45875 \begin_inset space ~
45883 \begin_layout Description
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45889 \begin_inset space ~
45892 Options offers settings for the export format
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45905 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45906 \begin_inset space ~
45909 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45913 \begin_inset space ~
45918 settings are described in detail in section
45920 Math Output in XHTML
45925 \begin_inset space ~
45934 \begin_inset space ~
45938 \begin_inset space ~
45943 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45946 \begin_layout Description
45948 \begin_inset space ~
45953 Save transient properties
45955 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45956 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45957 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45961 \begin_layout Itemize
45962 the activation of change tracking
45965 \begin_layout Itemize
45966 the output of tracked changes
45969 \begin_layout Itemize
45970 the recording of the document directory path.
45973 \begin_layout Standard
45974 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45975 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45979 \begin_layout Section
45987 \begin_layout Standard
45988 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45990 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45992 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45994 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45998 \begin_layout Standard
45999 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46000 -syntax is given in section
46001 \begin_inset space ~
46005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46007 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
46014 \begin_layout Chapter
46020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46022 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
46027 \begin_inset Index idx
46030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46039 \begin_layout Standard
46040 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
46042 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46046 It has the following submenus.
46049 \begin_layout Section
46053 \begin_layout Subsection
46057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46058 User Interface File
46059 \begin_inset Index idx
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 Customization ! of toolbars
46069 \begin_inset Index idx
46072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46073 Customization ! of menus
46081 \begin_layout Standard
46082 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
46083 interface (ui) file.
46084 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
46092 \begin_layout Description
46097 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
46100 \begin_layout Description
46107 the menu entries in popup context menus
46110 \begin_layout Description
46115 specifies the toolbar buttons
46118 \begin_layout Standard
46119 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
46120 and edit the entries.
46123 \begin_layout Standard
46124 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
46136 entries must be finished with an explicit
46161 and in the case of the
46162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46174 The syntax for the entries is:
46177 \begin_layout Standard
46178 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46207 \begin_layout Standard
46209 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46212 All the \SpecialChar LyX
46213 -functions are listed in the menu
46215 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46225 \begin_layout Standard
46226 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46232 \begin_layout Standard
46233 For example, assuming you use the menu
46235 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46238 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
46242 \begin_layout Standard
46243 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46267 \begin_layout Standard
46269 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46284 to have the sixth bookmark.
46287 \begin_layout Standard
46291 \begin_inset space ~
46296 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
46297 's toolbar buttons.
46298 The currently available icon sets are compared in
46299 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46302 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
46310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46314 \begin_layout Standard
46317 Enable tool tips in main work area
46319 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
46323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46327 \begin_layout Standard
46332 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
46333 should display in the menu
46335 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46337 \begin_inset space ~
46345 \begin_layout Subsection
46349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46353 \begin_layout Standard
46356 Restore window layouts and geometries
46359 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46360 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46364 \begin_layout Standard
46367 Restore cursor positions
46369 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46373 \begin_layout Standard
46376 Load opened files from last session
46378 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46382 \begin_layout Standard
46385 Clear all session information
46387 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46388 sessions (cursor positions, names
46389 of last opened documents, etc.).
46392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46396 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46401 \begin_inset Index idx
46404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46413 \begin_layout Standard
46416 Backup original documents when saving
46418 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46419 it was saved the last time.
46420 It is stored in the
46423 \begin_inset space ~
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46435 reference "sec:Paths"
46439 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46442 \begin_inset space ~
46448 The backup file has the file extension
46449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46463 \begin_layout Standard
46466 Backup documents, every
46468 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46471 \begin_layout Standard
46474 Save documents compressed by default
46476 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46477 \begin_inset space ~
46481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46483 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46488 This applies to newly created documents only.
46489 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46493 Windows & work area
46496 \begin_layout Standard
46499 Open documents in tabs
46501 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46505 \begin_layout Standard
46510 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46523 reference "sec:Paths"
46527 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46534 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46535 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46536 of \SpecialChar LyX
46538 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46539 instance is created for each file.
46542 \begin_layout Standard
46545 Single close-tab button
46547 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46557 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46558 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46559 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46563 \begin_layout Standard
46564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46573 before the change takes effect.
46581 \begin_layout Standard
46586 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46588 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46590 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46594 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46595 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46596 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46599 \begin_layout Subsection
46601 \begin_inset Index idx
46604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46613 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46620 \begin_layout Standard
46621 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46625 \begin_layout Standard
46626 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46634 This section only deals with the fonts
46638 the \SpecialChar LyX
46640 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46643 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46644 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46655 \begin_layout Standard
46656 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46673 (depends on the system) as its
46676 \begin_inset space ~
46692 \begin_layout Standard
46693 You can change the font size with the
46700 \begin_layout Standard
46705 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46710 points have the size of 1
46711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46715 \begin_inset space ~
46719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46721 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46726 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46731 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46732 \begin_inset space ~
46736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46738 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46745 \begin_layout Standard
46748 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46750 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46751 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46752 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46753 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46754 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46756 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46757 \begin_inset space ~
46763 \begin_layout Subsection
46765 \begin_inset Index idx
46768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46769 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46776 \begin_inset Index idx
46779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46788 \begin_layout Standard
46789 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46790 by choosing an item in the
46791 list and selecting the
46798 \begin_layout Standard
46799 By checking the option
46803 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46806 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46807 \begin_inset space ~
46811 \begin_inset space ~
46816 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46819 \begin_layout Subsection
46821 \begin_inset Index idx
46824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46833 \begin_layout Standard
46834 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46838 \begin_layout Standard
46843 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46844 This feature is described in section
46845 \begin_inset space ~
46849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46851 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46858 \begin_layout Standard
46859 Checking the option
46862 \begin_inset space ~
46866 \begin_inset space ~
46870 \begin_inset space ~
46875 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46878 \begin_layout Section
46880 \begin_inset Index idx
46883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46892 \begin_layout Subsection
46896 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46900 \begin_layout Standard
46903 Cursor follows scrollbar
46905 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46909 \begin_layout Standard
46910 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46911 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46912 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46915 \begin_layout Standard
46918 Scroll below end of document
46920 is self-explanatory.
46923 \begin_layout Standard
46924 In \SpecialChar LyX
46925 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46932 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46934 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46935 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46938 \begin_layout Standard
46941 Sort environments alphabetically
46943 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46946 \begin_layout Standard
46949 Group environments by their category
46951 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46954 \begin_layout Standard
46959 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46974 \begin_layout Standard
46975 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46980 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46981 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46985 \begin_layout Subsection
46987 \begin_inset Index idx
46990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46997 \begin_inset Index idx
47000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47001 Settings ! Shortcuts
47009 \begin_layout Standard
47014 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
47016 Several binding files are available, among them:
47019 \begin_layout Description
47020 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
47023 \begin_layout Description
47024 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
47036 \begin_layout Description
47037 mac.bind a set of bindings for
47040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47048 \begin_layout Standard
47049 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
47054 , and binding files for special languages.
47055 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
47056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47060 \begin_inset space \space{}
47064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47072 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
47073 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
47074 will try to use the appropriate binding
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47079 Some binding files, like
47083 , only have a limited scope.
47084 When looking at the end of the file
47088 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
47091 \begin_layout Standard
47095 \begin_inset space ~
47099 \begin_inset space ~
47104 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
47105 in the selected key binding file.
47108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47112 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
47117 \begin_inset Index idx
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 Key Bindings ! Editing
47129 \begin_layout Standard
47130 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
47131 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
47132 functions and the bound shortcuts.
47133 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
47136 Show key-bindings containing
47139 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
47140 Insert there for example as keyword
47141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47148 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
47149 functions that contain
47150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47158 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
47159 All \SpecialChar LyX
47160 functions are also listed in the file
47165 that you will find in the
47172 \begin_layout Standard
47173 For example, to add the shortcut
47181 , select the function and press the
47186 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
47187 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
47190 \begin_layout Standard
47191 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
47192 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
47194 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
47195 function names as a semicolon separated list.
47197 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
47202 \begin_layout Standard
47203 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
47206 \begin_layout Standard
47207 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
47209 The syntax of the entries is:
47212 \begin_layout Standard
47218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47237 \begin_layout Standard
47238 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
47239 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
47240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47267 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
47268 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
47269 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
47270 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
47272 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
47276 , you needed to specify it as
47281 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
47284 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
47287 \begin_layout Subsection
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47291 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47296 \begin_inset Index idx
47299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47306 \begin_inset Index idx
47309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47310 Settings ! Keyboard Map
47318 \begin_layout Standard
47319 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
47320 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
47321 provides keyboard maps.
47322 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
47323 is a Romanian one, you can enable
47326 \begin_inset space ~
47330 \begin_inset space ~
47335 and select the keyboard map file named
47342 \begin_layout Standard
47351 keyboard map and, if you use the
47355 bindings, you can select the first and second with
47358 arg "keymap-primary"
47364 arg "keymap-secondary"
47367 respectively or toggle between them with
47370 arg "keymap-toggle"
47376 \begin_layout Standard
47377 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47385 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47394 \begin_layout Standard
47395 You can also specify the mouse
47397 Wheel scrolling speed
47400 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47404 Middle mouse button pasting
47406 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47407 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47410 \begin_layout Standard
47418 \begin_inset space ~
47422 \begin_inset space ~
47427 you can select a key for zooming.
47428 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47431 \begin_layout Subsection
47435 \begin_layout Standard
47436 Input completion is described in section
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47443 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47450 \begin_layout Section
47452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47459 \begin_inset Index idx
47462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47469 \begin_inset Index idx
47472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 \begin_layout Standard
47482 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47483 are normally determined during
47485 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47488 \begin_layout Description
47490 \begin_inset space ~
47493 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47494 's working directory.
47495 It is the default when you
47506 \begin_inset space ~
47514 \begin_layout Description
47516 \begin_inset space ~
47519 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47521 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47535 \begin_layout Description
47537 \begin_inset space ~
47540 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47546 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47550 \begin_inset Newline newline
47554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47566 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47567 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47575 \begin_layout Description
47577 \begin_inset space ~
47581 \begin_inset Index idx
47584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47590 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47591 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47592 \begin_inset space ~
47596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47598 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47606 will be used to save the backups.
47607 \begin_inset Newline newline
47610 Backup files have the ending
47611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47621 \begin_layout Description
47623 \begin_inset space ~
47626 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47627 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47629 \begin_inset Newline newline
47636 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47642 You can edit this file with the program
47651 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47652 in its preferences under
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47661 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47666 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47668 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47669 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47675 and \SpecialChar LyX
47676 need to be running the same time.
47677 \begin_inset Newline newline
47680 The pipe is also used for the
47684 feature, see section
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47691 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47696 \begin_inset Newline newline
47699 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47700 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47701 \begin_inset Newline newline
47717 \begin_layout Description
47719 \begin_inset space ~
47722 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47725 \begin_layout Description
47727 \begin_inset space ~
47730 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47731 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47732 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47735 \begin_layout Description
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47740 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47746 You only need to specify it if you are using
47750 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47752 For \SpecialChar LyX
47757 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47761 \begin_layout Description
47763 \begin_inset space ~
47766 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47767 When \SpecialChar LyX
47768 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47769 to find it on the system.
47770 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47772 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47781 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47782 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47785 \begin_layout Description
47787 \begin_inset space ~
47790 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47791 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47792 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47793 code or in the document
47795 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47797 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47798 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47799 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47800 scanned for the input files.
47801 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47802 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47804 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47805 compilation may fail for some documents.
47808 \begin_layout Section
47812 \begin_layout Standard
47813 Here you can insert your
47822 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47824 \begin_inset space ~
47828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47830 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47834 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47837 \begin_layout Section
47839 \begin_inset Index idx
47842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47843 Language ! Settings
47849 \begin_inset Index idx
47852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47853 Settings ! Language
47861 \begin_layout Subsection
47863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47865 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47872 \begin_layout Description
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47878 \begin_inset space ~
47881 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47883 You can find its actual translation status here:
47884 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47886 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47894 \begin_layout Description
47896 \begin_inset space ~
47899 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47900 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47901 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47902 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47919 The most widespread language package is
47924 \begin_inset Index idx
47927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47934 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47936 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47937 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47938 come with the alternative
47944 \begin_inset Index idx
47947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47949 packages ! polyglossia
47954 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47955 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47961 The available selections are described in section
47962 \begin_inset space ~
47966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47968 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47975 \begin_layout Description
47977 \begin_inset space ~
47980 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47981 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47982 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47983 An example is the start command
47989 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47991 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47995 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48011 selectlanguage{$$lang}
48016 \begin_layout Description
48018 \begin_inset space ~
48026 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
48027 command toggles the package on and off.
48030 \begin_layout Description
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48036 \begin_inset space ~
48039 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
48043 \begin_layout Description
48045 \begin_inset space ~
48049 \begin_inset space ~
48052 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
48056 \begin_layout Description
48058 \begin_inset space ~
48062 \begin_inset space ~
48065 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
48066 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
48067 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
48069 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
48076 \begin_layout Description
48078 \begin_inset space ~
48081 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
48083 When this option is not set, the
48086 \begin_inset space ~
48091 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48093 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
48096 \begin_inset space ~
48104 \begin_layout Description
48106 \begin_inset space ~
48112 \begin_inset space ~
48118 When it is not set, the
48121 \begin_inset space ~
48126 is set to the end of the document.
48129 \begin_layout Description
48131 \begin_inset space ~
48135 \begin_inset space ~
48138 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
48139 language will be underlined in blue.
48142 \begin_layout Description
48144 \begin_inset space ~
48148 \begin_inset space ~
48151 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
48152 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
48155 \begin_layout Description
48157 \begin_inset space ~
48160 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
48161 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
48162 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
48163 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
48166 \begin_layout Subsection
48170 \begin_layout Standard
48171 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
48172 \begin_inset space ~
48176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48178 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48185 \begin_layout Section
48189 \begin_layout Subsection
48191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48193 name "subsec:General-output"
48200 \begin_layout Description
48202 \begin_inset space ~
48205 search Commands that will be used for the menu
48207 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48209 \begin_inset space ~
48215 For a detailed description see section
48217 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48222 \begin_inset space ~
48230 \begin_layout Description
48232 \begin_inset space ~
48235 Options Options for the program
48239 that is used for the export format
48244 \begin_inset space ~
48248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48250 reference "subsec:Export"
48255 Possible options are listed in the
48260 \begin_inset Newline newline
48264 \begin_inset Flex URL
48267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48269 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
48279 \begin_layout Description
48281 \begin_inset space ~
48285 \begin_inset space ~
48288 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
48291 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48292 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
48294 \begin_inset space ~
48300 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
48303 \begin_layout Description
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48309 \begin_inset Index idx
48312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48319 \begin_inset Index idx
48322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48323 Settings ! Date format
48328 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
48329 \begin_inset Newline newline
48333 \begin_inset Flex URL
48336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48338 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
48344 \begin_inset Newline newline
48347 For example the format
48348 \begin_inset Newline newline
48352 \begin_inset Newline newline
48355 prints the date as day/month/year.
48358 \begin_layout Description
48360 \begin_inset space ~
48364 \begin_inset space ~
48367 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
48368 is allowed to overwrite on export.
48371 \begin_layout Subsection
48377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48379 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
48384 \begin_inset Index idx
48387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48388 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48397 \begin_layout Description
48399 \begin_inset space ~
48407 \begin_inset space ~
48411 \begin_inset space ~
48414 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48419 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48440 are used for Cyrillic.
48441 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48454 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48456 sets up in the background.
48457 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48460 \begin_layout Description
48462 \begin_inset space ~
48466 \begin_inset space ~
48470 \begin_inset space ~
48474 \begin_inset space ~
48477 options They only have an effect when the program
48481 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48484 \begin_layout Standard
48485 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48486 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48487 manuals of the applications.
48490 \begin_layout Description
48492 \begin_inset space ~
48495 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48496 \begin_inset space ~
48500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48502 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48509 \begin_layout Description
48511 \begin_inset space ~
48514 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48515 \begin_inset space ~
48519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48521 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48528 \begin_layout Description
48530 \begin_inset space ~
48533 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48534 \begin_inset space ~
48538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48540 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48547 \begin_layout Description
48553 \begin_inset space ~
48556 command Command for the program
48558 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48561 that is described in the section
48563 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48568 Additional Features
48573 \begin_layout Standard
48574 There are additionally the following options:
48577 \begin_layout Description
48579 \begin_inset space ~
48583 \begin_inset space ~
48587 \begin_inset space ~
48591 \begin_inset space ~
48596 \begin_inset space ~
48599 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48617 to separate folders.
48618 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48620 \begin_inset Index idx
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48630 \begin_inset Index idx
48633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48642 \begin_layout Description
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48648 \begin_inset space ~
48652 \begin_inset space ~
48656 \begin_inset space ~
48660 \begin_inset space ~
48664 \begin_inset space ~
48667 changes Removes all manually set
48673 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48674 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48676 \begin_inset space ~
48681 dialog when changing the document class.
48684 \begin_layout Section
48686 \begin_inset space ~
48690 \begin_inset Index idx
48693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48702 \begin_layout Subsection
48704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48706 name "subsec:Converters"
48711 \begin_inset Index idx
48714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48723 \begin_layout Standard
48724 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48725 from one format to another.
48726 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48727 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48734 \begin_inset space ~
48739 field and press the
48744 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48748 \begin_inset space ~
48753 drop-down list, modify the
48757 field and press the
48764 \begin_layout Standard
48767 Converter File Cache
48773 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48775 Maximum Age (in days
48778 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48779 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48782 \begin_layout Standard
48783 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48784 definition, is described in the section
48795 \begin_layout Subsection
48797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48799 name "sec:File-Formats"
48804 \begin_inset Index idx
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48814 \begin_inset Index idx
48817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48826 \begin_layout Standard
48827 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48837 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48840 \begin_layout Standard
48841 You can also define the
48843 Default output format
48845 that is used when you use
48847 View, Update, View Master Document
48851 Update Master Document
48857 menu or the toolbar.
48860 \begin_layout Standard
48861 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48872 \begin_layout Standard
48873 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48875 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48876 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48877 This is done by specifying a
48882 More about this is described in the section
48893 \begin_layout Chapter
48894 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48896 \begin_inset Index idx
48899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48908 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48915 \begin_layout Standard
48917 \begin_inset space ~
48921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48923 reference "tab:Units"
48927 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48928 and used in this documentation.
48931 \begin_layout Standard
48932 \begin_inset Float table
48938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48939 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48957 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48965 \begin_inset Tabular
48966 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48967 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48969 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48970 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49123 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
49127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49394 scaled point (65536
49395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49462 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
49467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49586 % of original image width
49591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49675 \begin_layout Standard
49676 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49679 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49686 \begin_layout Bibliography
49687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49688 LatexCommand bibitem
49695 The \SpecialChar LyX
49697 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49700 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49706 \begin_inset Newline newline
49710 \begin_inset Flex URL
49713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49715 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49723 \begin_layout Bibliography
49724 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49725 LatexCommand bibitem
49726 key "latexcompanion"
49731 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49733 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49734 Companion Second Edition.
49737 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49740 \begin_layout Bibliography
49741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49742 LatexCommand bibitem
49748 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49751 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49755 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49758 \begin_layout Bibliography
49759 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49760 LatexCommand bibitem
49769 : A Document Preparation System.
49772 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49775 \begin_layout Bibliography
49776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49777 LatexCommand bibitem
49787 The \SpecialChar TeX
49791 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49794 \begin_layout Bibliography
49795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49796 LatexCommand bibitem
49802 The \SpecialChar TeX
49804 \begin_inset Newline newline
49808 \begin_inset Flex URL
49811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49813 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49821 \begin_layout Bibliography
49822 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49823 LatexCommand bibitem
49829 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49831 \begin_inset Newline newline
49835 \begin_inset Flex URL
49838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49840 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49848 \begin_layout Bibliography
49849 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49850 LatexCommand bibitem
49857 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49859 name "Documentation"
49860 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49867 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49871 \begin_inset Newline newline
49875 \begin_inset Flex URL
49878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49880 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49888 \begin_layout Bibliography
49889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49890 LatexCommand bibitem
49897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49899 name "Documentation"
49900 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49905 how to use the program
49907 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49911 \begin_inset Newline newline
49915 \begin_inset Flex URL
49918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49920 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49928 \begin_layout Bibliography
49929 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49930 LatexCommand bibitem
49937 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49939 name "Documentation"
49940 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49945 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49951 \begin_inset Index idx
49954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49956 packages ! biblatex
49962 \begin_inset Newline newline
49966 \begin_inset Flex URL
49969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49971 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49979 \begin_layout Bibliography
49980 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49981 LatexCommand bibitem
49988 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49990 name "Documentation"
49991 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49996 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50002 \begin_inset Index idx
50005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50013 \begin_inset Newline newline
50017 \begin_inset Flex URL
50020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50022 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
50030 \begin_layout Bibliography
50031 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50032 LatexCommand bibitem
50039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50041 name "Documentation"
50042 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
50052 \begin_inset Newline newline
50056 \begin_inset Flex URL
50059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50061 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
50069 \begin_layout Bibliography
50070 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50071 LatexCommand bibitem
50072 key "makeindex-man"
50078 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50081 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
50091 \begin_inset Newline newline
50095 \begin_inset Flex URL
50098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50100 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
50108 \begin_layout Bibliography
50109 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50110 LatexCommand bibitem
50117 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50119 name "Documentation"
50120 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
50130 \begin_inset Newline newline
50134 \begin_inset Flex URL
50137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50139 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
50147 \begin_layout Bibliography
50148 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50149 LatexCommand bibitem
50156 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50158 name "Documentation"
50159 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
50164 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
50166 \begin_inset Newline newline
50170 \begin_inset Flex URL
50173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50175 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
50183 \begin_layout Bibliography
50184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50185 LatexCommand bibitem
50192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50194 name "Documentation"
50195 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
50200 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50206 \begin_inset Index idx
50209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50217 \begin_inset Newline newline
50221 \begin_inset Flex URL
50224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50226 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
50234 \begin_layout Bibliography
50235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50236 LatexCommand bibitem
50243 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50245 name "Documentation"
50246 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
50251 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50257 \begin_inset Index idx
50260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50262 packages ! enumitem
50268 \begin_inset Newline newline
50272 \begin_inset Flex URL
50275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50277 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
50285 \begin_layout Bibliography
50286 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50287 LatexCommand bibitem
50294 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50296 name "Documentation"
50297 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
50302 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50308 \begin_inset Index idx
50311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50313 packages ! fancyhdr
50319 \begin_inset Newline newline
50323 \begin_inset Flex URL
50326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50328 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
50336 \begin_layout Bibliography
50337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50338 LatexCommand bibitem
50345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50347 name "Documentation"
50348 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
50353 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50359 \begin_inset Index idx
50362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50364 packages ! hyperref
50370 \begin_inset Newline newline
50374 \begin_inset Flex URL
50377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50379 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
50387 \begin_layout Bibliography
50388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50389 LatexCommand bibitem
50396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50398 name "Documentation"
50399 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
50404 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50410 \begin_inset Index idx
50413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50415 packages ! microtpye
50421 \begin_inset Newline newline
50425 \begin_inset Flex URL
50428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50430 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
50438 \begin_layout Bibliography
50439 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50440 LatexCommand bibitem
50447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50449 name "Documentation"
50450 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50455 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50461 \begin_inset Index idx
50464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50472 \begin_inset Newline newline
50476 \begin_inset Flex URL
50479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50481 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50489 \begin_layout Bibliography
50490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50491 LatexCommand bibitem
50498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50500 name "Documentation"
50501 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50506 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50512 \begin_inset Index idx
50515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50517 packages ! prettyref
50523 \begin_inset Newline newline
50527 \begin_inset Flex URL
50530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50532 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50540 \begin_layout Bibliography
50541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50542 LatexCommand bibitem
50549 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50551 name "Documentation"
50552 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50557 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50563 \begin_inset Index idx
50566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50568 packages ! refstyle
50574 \begin_inset Newline newline
50578 \begin_inset Flex URL
50581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50583 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50591 \begin_layout Bibliography
50592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50593 LatexCommand bibitem
50600 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50603 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50608 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50610 \begin_inset Newline newline
50614 \begin_inset Flex URL
50617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50619 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50627 \begin_layout Bibliography
50628 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50629 LatexCommand bibitem
50636 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50639 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50644 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50646 \begin_inset Newline newline
50650 \begin_inset Flex URL
50653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50655 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50663 \begin_layout Bibliography
50664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50665 LatexCommand bibitem
50672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50675 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50680 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50681 for Cyrillic languages:
50682 \begin_inset Newline newline
50686 \begin_inset Flex URL
50689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50691 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50699 \begin_layout Bibliography
50700 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50701 LatexCommand bibitem
50708 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50711 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50716 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50718 \begin_inset Newline newline
50722 \begin_inset Flex URL
50725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50727 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50735 \begin_layout Bibliography
50736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50737 LatexCommand bibitem
50744 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50747 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50752 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50754 \begin_inset Newline newline
50758 \begin_inset Flex URL
50761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50763 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50771 \begin_layout Bibliography
50772 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50773 LatexCommand bibitem
50780 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50783 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50788 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50790 \begin_inset Newline newline
50794 \begin_inset Flex URL
50797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50799 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50807 \begin_layout Standard
50808 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50842 \begin_inset Note Note
50845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50852 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50853 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50854 bibliography is the second one:
50862 \begin_layout Standard
50863 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50864 LatexCommand bibtex
50865 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50866 options "biblio/alphadin"
50873 \begin_layout Standard
50874 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50878 \begin_layout Standard
50882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50888 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50897 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50905 \begin_inset Note Note
50908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50909 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50910 \begin_inset space ~
50914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50916 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50928 \begin_layout Standard
50929 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50930 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50936 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50937 LatexCommand printindex